DOCUMENT RESUME

ED 229 948 EC 151 957

AUTHOR Noel, Margaret M., Ed.; Haring, Norris G., Ed. TITLE Progress or Change: Issues in Educating the Emotionally Disturbed. Volume 1: Identification and Program Planning. INSTITUTION Washington Univ., Seattle. Program Development Assistance System. SPONS AGENCY Office of Special Education and Rehabilitative Services (ED), Washington, DC. Div. of Innovation and Development. PUB DATE Sep 82 CONTRACT 300-79-0062 NOTE 172p.; For a related document, see EC 151 958. PUB TYPE Books (010) -- Viewpoints (120) Information Analyses (070)

EDRS PRICE MF01/PC07 Plus Postage. DESCRIPTORS *Administrative Problems; Agency Cooperation; *Behavior Disorders; *Definitions; Delivery Systems; Educational History; Elementary Secondary Education; *Emotional Disturbances; Evaluation Methods; *Handicap Identification; Program Development; Student Evaluation; Student Placement ABSTRACT Seven papers focus on issues in identification and educational program planning for children with emotional disturbances. "Social Policy Issues in Special Education and Related Services for 'Emotionally Disturbed Children and Youth" (J. Kauffman), touches on problems with the federal definition of and terminology about the emotionally disturbed and suggests possible reasons for inadequate services to this population. Two major areas (conceptual and procedural) relating to the assessment of mild behavior disorders in children are examined in "Assessment of Behavior Disorgaers in the School Setting: Issues, Problems, and Strategies" by H. Walker. Biophysical, psychodynamic, behavioral, sociological, and ecological perspectives in assessment are considered, and a 9-step model is proposed by B. Algozzine ("Assessment of Severe Behavior Disorders"). S. Braaten presents "A Model for the Differential Assessmet and Placement of Emotionally Disturbed Students in Special Education Programs," in which data are assigned priority ratings to convey the extent of the student's disturbing behavior. N. Haring reviews historical developments in "Perspectives on the Development'of Educational Programs for the Emotionally Disturbed." Interprofessional and interagency collaboration are among the major topics considered in "Cooperative Full Service Delivery to Emotionally Disturbed Students" by F. Wood. Eligibility, placement, discipline (suspension, expulsion, corporal punishment), and related services are covered in "Administrative Issues in Educating Emotionally Disturbed Students in the Public Schools" by B. Tilley, J. Gross, and L. Cog.(CL) U.S. DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATION NATIONAL INSTITUTEOF EDUCATION EDUCATIONAL RESOURCES INFORMATION CENTER (ERIC) CI This document has been reproducedas received from theperson or organization originating it. L. Minor changes have been made toimprove reproduction quality.

Points of view or opinions stated in this docu- ment do not necessarily represent official NIE position or policy.

Progress or Change; PDAS Program Development Issues in Educating the Assistance System University of Washington Emotionaliy Disturbed Volume 1: Identification and Program Planning

arclaret M. riarrcl criG. Harrq 'enes Edlor Norris G. Haring, Principal Investigator Margaret M. Noel, Project Coordinator Donna Z. Mirkes, Productio. Editor Leslie A. Wright, Graphics Judith C. Christner, Cover Design Ina-Marie J. Ostendorf, Proofreader

This document was produced under contract number 300-79-0062 from the United States Education Pepartment, Special Education Programs, Division of Innovation kind Developnwnt. Program Development Branch. The opinions expressed herein do not necessary reflect the position or policy of the United States Education Department, and no official endorsement of U.S.E.D. should be inferred.

Printed in the United States of America.

September 1982 Contents Contributors vi

Preface vii Part 1: Identification and Assessment

Social Policy Issues in Special Education and Related 1 Services for Emotionally Disturbed Children and Youth James M. Kauffman

Assessment of Behavior Disorders in the School 11 Setting: Issues, Problems, and Strategies Hill M. Walker

Assessment of Severe Behavior Disorders 43 Bob Algozzine

A Model for the Differential Assessment and 61 Placement of Emotionally Disturbed Students in Special Education Programs Sheldon Braaten

Part 2*: Planning Public School Programs Perspectives on the Development of Educational 97 Programs for the Emotionally Disturbed Norris G. Haring

Cooperative Full Service Delivery to Emotionally 115 Disturbed Students Frank H. Wood

Administrative Issues in Educating Emotionally 135 Disturbed Students in the Public Schools Bill K. Tilley Jerry C. Gross Linda S. Cox Contributors

Bob Algozzine,CollegeofEducation,UniversityofFlorida, Gainsville, FL 32611

Sheldon Braaten, 1153 Benton Way, St. Paul, MN 55112 Norris G. Haring, College of Education, University of Washington,

. Seattle, WA 98195

James M. Kauffman, Department of Special EducatioR, University of Virginia, Charlottesville, VA 22903 Linda S. Cox, Department of Special Education, Seattle Public Schools, Seattle, WA 98109

Jerry C. Gross, Departalent of Special Education, Long Beach Public Schools, Long Beach, CA 90801 Bill K. Tilley, Department of Special Education, Seattle Public Schools, Seattle, WA 98109 Hill M. Walker, Division of Special Education and Rehabilitation, University of Oregon, Eugene, OR 97403

Frar.k H. Wood, College of Education, Special Education Programs, Department of Psychoeducational Studies, Minneapolis; MN 55455

Margaret M. Noel, The Institute for the Study of Exceptional Children and Youth, University of Maryland, College Park, MD 20742

5 Preface

Margaret M. Noel Norris G. Haring

Providing suitable educational facilities for emotionally disturbed chil- dren has historically been a problem. These children have presented an anomaly for educators, challenging the categorical distinctions of the .ed- ucational classification system. In the past, emotionally disturbed chil- dren were considered beyond the services of public education, ill-suited for the mediated programs of more severely handicapped students, yet too disruptive for placement in the regular classroom. They have been an underserved population, referred for clinical treatment of their emotional conflicts, often at thp expense of their education. In the last two-and-a-half decades, the availability of educational facili- ties for this group has increased. Based on the premise that ". . . what is good for educational progress is also good for social and emotional growth" (Haring & Phillips, 1962, p. 2), educational programs became the basic "therapy" provided to these students. Rather than establish clinical remediation of behavioral problems as an antecedent to educa- tion, the classroom combined a positive supportive environment with the incentives afforded by academic progress. In addition, to an increase in the sheer numbers of programs, the past 25 years have also seen the emer- gence of several strong conceptual or theoretical approaches to educating the emotionally disturbed, Out of these models have come a number of important precepts that have influenced the development of educational service programs. These include the concept of structure and the effec-

6 tiveness of direct behavioral intervention as ;Well as a recognition of the importance of the student's family and the total ecology or environment. The past 25 years of research and development have resulted in a large body of literature as well as the establishment of a separate, albeit not necessarily distinct, field within special education. For, despite the amount of work that has been done, special education for the emotionally disturbed has conInstently been plagued with certain problems. Chief among these is the very definition of "emotional disturbance." Clearly apparent throughout the chapters in this monograph as well as in the pro- fessional literature is the uncertainty and outright confusion ovet what constitutes emotional disturbance and which students can be classified as such. This confusion is evident in the terms used to describe these stu- dentsterms such as "seriously emotionally disturbed," "behavior dis- ordered," and "emotionally impaired." These definitional problems, with the attendant difficulties in identification, clearly seem to be the greatest impediment to full educational programming for these students. Recently, the defintional problems have been compounded by proposed changes in the regulations governing PL 94-142. If approved, these regu- lations will remove the exclusion of -socially maladjusted" from the fed- eral definition of "Seriously Emotionally Disturbed." Initial reactions from program administrators has been concern over which students now will be eligible for service, Despite the terminology and the concerns regarding eligibility, all profes- sionals fully recognize that the needs of these students as well as the problems faced by the educational systems that must develop -programs are real. In fact, the conceptualization of what WEIS originally to be one monograph grew out of. ihe concerns expressed by "grass roots" people teachers and program administrators;who work with the emotionally disturbed. Their concerns, which were echoed in the professional litera- ture, focused on two major areas First and foremost were the problems of identification and assessment; assessment for deciding eligibility for ser- vices as' well as for developing meaningful educational programs that ad- dress sodal and emotional needs as well as academics. Following assess- ment, the concerns centered or the organization of services, particularly in light of the diverse needs of the emotionally disturbed. Frequently mentioned were the problems of dealing, within a public school program, with disordered fami lies and community disruptions. To separate the emotional and social problems of emotionally disturbed chi ldrer. from their academic needs would be to igno-e the basic tenet of their condition. While the classroom has been transformed to provide a benign learning environment, these children need to have the positive aspects of education extended throughout the special services available outside the classroom. A comprehensive system of management for inter- vention strategies, coupled with the establishment of partnerships with paronts amid service professionals, enables an order to permeate their ex- periences. Through the continuous coordination of extended educational services, these children can be influenced by an educational reality that extends through all facets of their lives. The disparity between home life and educational instruction can be removed. The complexity of issues was such that two volumes have been devoted to a discussion of the issues. Volume I provides an extensive discussion of the problems inherent in the definition and the companion problems of assessment. In addition, this volume also examines the issues related to developing and planning programs in the public schools. Volume II addresses the major areas related to service delivery, including both the organization and operation of publ,ic school programs, as well as consid- erations for alternative living arrangements. In addition, a chapter is de- voted to presenting the personal experiences of several parents of emo- tionally disturbed children. Together the two monographs present an overview of the complex prob- lems involved in providing suitable educational facilities for emotionally disturbed children. Educators and service professionals are being called upon to make critical decisions. PL 94-142 has delegated an enormous responsibility to the public schools, straining their resources and ques- tioning whether the present system of special services is adequate to the demands of a growing population of special students. School districts are confronting their own inadequacies and must realistically appraise their potential. The decisions concerning the effectiveness of special programs will be critical for the future of special education. If a change in services or curriculum is to be made, the time for instituting this change is the present. These volumes are designed as a guide to facilitate the process of self-appraisal. By providing a synthesis of existing programs, new educa- tional technologies, and the legal ramifications of mainstreaming, we hope to establish a factual basis with which to approach intelligently the problems at hand.

M.M.N. N.G.H.

Reference List

I taring. N. G.. & Phillips. E. 1.. Educating emotionally disturbed childrvn. Now York: McGraw- Hill Inc.. 1962.

'a Part 1: Identification and Assessment Social Policy Issues in Special Education and Related Services for Emotionally Disturbed Children and Youth

James M'. Kauffman

With respect to special education for emotionally disturbed children, there is today one overarching social policy issue. The issue rests on the problem of clefi,Qition, and it involves this question: Can the right of all disturbed children to special education be assured by government de- cree? My belief is that that right can not be guaranteed and that attempts to guarantee it are and will invariably be sham. My reasons for believing that the guarantee is necessarily sham are these: the definition of emo- tional disturbance is arbitrary; the current federal definition is very seri- ously flawed; the identification of disturbed children is subjective and somewhat unreliable even with the best definition one can construct; and the rights of handicapPed persons present a set of policy problems that is essentially different from those presented by the rights of more objec- tively defineable minority groups whose distinguishing characteristics are irrelevant to their participation in social institutions. Current policy does not assure all disturbed children an appropriate education. The cen- tral issues involving definition, mandated services, and legal rights effec- tively preclude well-reasoned consideration of other policy questions, such as those regarding the nature of special education services, teacher training, and research. Answers to policy questions regarding services, training, and research are always hopelessly ambiguous when the defini- tion of the population to be served is ambiguous and the children are un- reliably identified.

10 1

4 Kauffman

The Arbitrariness pf Definition

Emotional disturbance presents a peculiar set of problems for policy mak- ers because it is, probably to a greater extent than anyother type of excep- tionality. a figment of social convention. Perhaps because psychiatry has been extremely influential in the formation of public attitudes and social policy, creating an assumption that "disturbed emotions" and "mental illness" are disease entities, current social policy does not reflect the arbi- trariness of the definition of emotional disturbance. Scull (1975) has de- scribed how the medical profession gained control over the designation and management of certain types of social deviance during the nine- teenth century, eventually fixing in the public mind the notion that much troubling social behavior is attributable to physiological causes or arcane intrapsychic features and is treatable only by medical science. But it is abundantly clear that emotional disturbance is not a disease in any usual sense of the termit is not a separate, distinct entitythat invades a per- son or can be assessed reliably withoUt reference tothe environment in which a person lives. Rather, it is, as suggested elsewhere (Kauffman, 1979,1981a: Kauffman & Kneed ler, 1981), a phenomenon involving com- plex interactions among what a person does, how that person perceives and evaluates his or her own behavior and the environment, and hew the environment responds.. And it is the failure to come to grips with this central problem of definition or description of emotional disturbance that leads to the primary policy issues today. Conceptual confusion and disagreement have always been rife among professionals who deal with disturbed children. The lack of consensus about what the problem of such children really is and what can or slmuld be done about it has been highlighted by numerous writers and several major projects, including the Conceptual Pro;act in Emotional Distur- bance (Rhodes & Head, 1974; Rhodes & Tracy 1972a, b) and the Preject on the Classification of Children (Hobbs, 1975a, b). Perhaps Rhodes and Paul have written the most stiCi:inct statement of the difficulty faced by schok ars and policy makers: The epiphenomenal problem of deviance is complex and the definitions that exist are many. Each time a group of special Lhildren gain social and profes- sional attention, a plethora of definitions of the problems of these children fol- low. The in(onsistency is not, as is typically thought, simply in the definitions, but rather :n the primary view of the world from which the definition is derived. 111178, p. 137) The differences among the Weltanschanungs of various influential indi- viduals and groups are reflected both in terminological chaos and in cur- rent social policy that is starkly unsuccessful in meeting the needsof most disturbed children. There is no standard term inology forthe prob- lems of disturbed children or even for the general category "Seriously Emotionally Disturbed." In fact, it is not uncommon to read or hear an extensive discourse on the differences between "emotional disturbance" and "behavior disorder" or between "emotional disturbance" and "social Social Policy

maladjustment," Moreover, the rules and regulations related to PL 94-142 contain, in the definition of seriously emotionally disturbed, an at- tempted distinction between emotional disturbance and social malad- justment. Certainly children can and do exhibit social deviance in many different ways. Nevertheless, attempts to distinguish between groups des- ignated by many of the common labels for social deviance, includingso- cially maladjusted and seriously emotionally disturbed,are useless, or worse, ih formulating social policy.

Flaws in the Federal Definition

The problems of definition and terminology deserve close scrutiny be- cause they are the beginning points for building a social policy. Current policy derives from a definition, with certain modifications, offered by Bower (1909). The definition of seriously emotionally disturbed included in federal rules reads as follows (with significant addenda to Bower's def- inition indicated by italics): (I) The term means a condition c?xhibiting one or more of the following char- acteristics over a long period of time and to a marked degree which ad- versely affects educational performance: (A) An inability to learn which cannot be explained by intellectual, sensory, or health factors;

(13) An inability to buiki or maintain satisfactory relationships with peers and teachers; (C)Inappropriate types of behavior or feelings under normal circumstances: (D) A gmwral perva: ive mood of unhappiness or depression; or (1;) A temhmcy to develop physical .,ymptoms or fears associated with per- sonal or school problems. (ii)The term Mcludes children who are schizophrenic m. atm t tht ic. TIi . term does not include children who are socially mahuljusted, unless it is deter- mined that they arr seriously emotionally disturbed. (Fe(eral Register, 1977, p. 42,478)

Bower's definition is probably as useful as any that has been Written to date. It lists five charicteristics that are likely to result in a child's receiv- ing a deviance label, and so it is useful in providing a general description of child behavior that is of concern to adults and that results in an educa- tional handicap. But such description is not a sufficient basis for a social policy that mandates intervention for every disturbed child because it does not provide an unambiguous statement of who is and who is not disturbed. Consider, for example, the subjective interpretation that is re- quired by some of the key terms and phrases in the definition: "to a marked extent," "over a long period of time," "satisfactory interpersonal ,relationships," "inappropriate," "pervasive," and "tendency."

3 12 Kauffman

The addenda to Bower's definition do not clarify anything. They are, in fact, redundant and obfuscatory. The addition of the clause"wilich ad- versely affects educational performande" is particularly puzzling. It is re- dundant with characteristics (A), "An inability to learn . .. ," if educa- tional performanceisconsideredto mean academic achievement. Furthermore, it seems extrElmelv unlikely that a chitd could exhibit one or more of the characteristics listed to a-markeddegree and for a long time i;vithout adverse effects on academic progress. But what of the child who exhibits, let us say, characteristic (D), "A general pervasive mood of un- happiness or depression," and is academically advanced for his or her age and grade? If educational performance isinterpreted to mean aca- demic achievement, then the child would seem to be excludedficim the category of seriously emotionally disturbed; if, on the other hand,educa- tional performance is interpreted to include personal and social satisfac- thin in the school setting, then the clause is superfluous. At the outset, then, the federal addendum to part (i) of thedefinition con- fuses the issue of the type of problem that should be the concern of spe- cial educators. But an even greater confusion is created by part (ii)regard- ing schizophrenia 'and autism' (i.e., childhood psychosis),and social maladjustment in relation to serious emotional disturbance. It is clearly inconceivable that a psychotic child would not be included under the dafinition.; any such child wilbexhibit one or more of the five characteris- tics (especially B and/or C) to a marked degree and over along period of tinie. Hence, the addendum is unnecessary. The last addendum regarding social maladjustment is logically impenetrable. A child could not be so- cially maladjusted by any credible interpretation of the term without ,ex- hibiting one or more of the five characteristics (especially B andior C) to a marked degree and over a long period of time. One is foited t2 conclude that the federal definition is, if notclaptrap, at least dangerously close to nonsenseAt is not surprising that socialpolicy based on such a definition is problematic. Two questions, then, present. themselves: 1) Could he definition be significantly improved? and 2) Would an improved definition resolve the social policy problems?

Definition and the Problem of Identification

The definition could be improved considerably by omitting theadoeada to Bower's characteristics. Removal of the addenda wouldeliminate the logical inconsistencies, terminological confusion, and redundanciesAut

!Federal rules and regulations have been changed. Autism has become asubcate- gory under "Other Health Impaired" rather thanunder "Serious Emotional Distur- bance." Bower(1982)recently noted some of thepolicyproblems Presented by the exclusion of autism and social maladjustment.

13 4 Social Policy

it would not eliminate the most fundamental problemthe factthat emo- tional disturbance is whatever we choose to make it. This central problem is not unique to emotional disturbance. It is a fundamental and unresolv- able problemNin mentar retardation, learning disabilities, and other condi- tions/de-fined by social convention; and it is a more obvious prob.em in the case of milder forms of social deviance. The problem in mental retar- dation was described pungently by Blatt: The most recent, little appreciated but astonishing revision of the American As- sociation on Mental Deficiency definition of mental retardation to include theo- retical psychometric retardationto from one to two standard deviations on the "wrong" side of the mean literally revolutionized the inci- dence, prevalence, and concept of mental retardation, all with the simple stroke of Herbert Grossman's pen. We cannot redefine measles, or cancer,or, pregnancy with so easy and such external procedures. The Grossman Committee, sitting around a conference table, reduced enormously the incidence of mental retarda- tion, never having to "see," or "dose," or deal with a client, only having to say that, hereinafter, mental retardation is such and such, rather than this or that. What, then, is mental retardation?? (1075, p. 414) The fact' that emotional disturbance has no objective reality--like mental retardation, it is whatever we choose to make itmakes a social policy that mandates special services for all disturbed children and exacts pen- alties for noncompliance a tragic mockery. This would not necessarily be the case if there were highly reliable means of measuring the extent to which children meet an arbitrary behavioral standardthat is, the prob- lem is not inherent only in the arbitrariness of the definition, but also in the difficulty in determining whether a given individual meets a standard set by the definition. A definition can be arbitrary, yet serve social policy purposes well. For example, 18 years and older arbitrarily defines the population that is vot- ing age today, and the former arbitrary standard of 21 years was negated. But there is seldom serious doubt about whether or not a givenindividual is a certain age. Were the determination of age anunreliable process or were a much less objective criterion (e.g.,"social maturity") chosen as the standard for defining the voting population, then a different set of policies regarding voter registration and voting rights would be required. The definition of emotional disturbance cannot be reduced merely to a set of objectiVely observable behaviors; subjective judgmentof how the child; functions in a given environment is always required (Kauffman, 1981a). Hence, unreliability in iantification can never be completely eliminated.

Definition, Identification, and Rights

The Zeitgeist of the civil rights movement swept up the cause of the handicapped in the 1970s. Civil rights concerns led ultimately to the

5 Kauffnian

propositions of Section 504 and PL 94-142, some of whic:h now appear to be untenable. The civil rights movement fostered the notion that any mi- nority, however defined, can be rationally and responsibly guaranteed its rights, however its rights are &Hued. Thus, today we have a policy guar- anteeing the right to appropriate education ("appropriate" being very ill defined) for populations that are defined in practice primarily by the exi- gencies of, the moment. Special education for seriously emotionally dis- turbed children is guaranteed under PL 94-142, not because the popula- tion is well defined, but rather because the rightS movement could not tolerate the exclusion of any population of the handicapped, no matter how poorly defined or how undefinable and no matter how absurd the notion that El n ill-defined group can be assured its peculiar rights by the coercive pressure of government. The implementation of c:ivil rights legislation is a complex and arduous task. In cases involving minorities or other groups whose definition an(1 identification are relatively unambiguous and whose members seldom can pass as members of a different class (races and sexes, for example), civil rights can perhaps be effectively guaranteed by law. A new and com- plex dimension is added to the problem of civil rights implementatimi, however, when the very identification of an individual as a member of a special population or class (i.e., in "legalese," a "suspect class" deserving special protection of the law) is arguable. Judgments about a child's be- havior that lead to his identification as seriously emotionally disturbed are, unlike those defining race and sex, necessarily both arbitraryn d subjective. Not only must one consider the accuracy of an individual's identification, but also the c:onsequences of such identification. Identifi- cation of the child as disturbed bestows certain rights upon him (e.g., the right to an IEP, to due process hearings, to education in the least restric- tive environment), whereas failure to identify him affords no special pro- tection of the law (the assumption being that if he is not a handicapped ch(1 , then his rights are already sufficiently protected by laws governing the education-of nonhandicapped children). The intent of Section 504 and PL 94-142 may have been to guarantee the rights of all seriously emo- tionally disturbed and other handicapped children to special education. But it will be particularly difficult, if not impossible, to fulfill that guar- antee for emotionally disturbed children because their identification is subjective and can be avoided by school officials when it is in their own best interests to do so.

Effects of Current Policy and a Possible Policy Change

Given that handicapped children must be identified in order to receive special protection of the hiw and appropriate education and related ser- vices, but also that identification is a subjective and unreliable process, what is the result of a policy that not only requires identification of all

6 ir Social Policy

disturbed children but demands as well that all identified children be served? The result is a disastrous hypocrisy. It cannot be otherwise: One must consider that current policy emphasizes punishment for non-. compliance, not reward for approximations of full compliance. To re- quire school officials to be perfectly candid about the number of emotion- allydisturbed childrenintheir schoolsistorequire theirself- incrimination. Consider the facts that have been presented more exten- sively in other sourcs (see Grosenick & Huntze, 1979; Kauffman, 1980, 1981a; Magliocca & Stephens, 1980). First, prevalence studies indicate that 2% is an extremely conservative estimate of the percentage of school age children and youth who are reasonably considered tobe emotionally disturbed, vet only about one-third of that percentage (i.e., about 0.7%) are being served by special educationin spite of the factthat the law says tin': every handicapped child must be served. 2 Aconservative esti- mate of the additional cost of serving 2% of the school age population as emotionally disturbed is $2.3 billion per year, not more than 40% pf which would be provided by the federal government. Even if the funds were made available in 1982, school officials could not findadequate per- sonnel to staff the programsthe trained personnel do not exist and can- not be quickly obtained at any price. In short, current policy has not resulted in services for anywhere near the number of disturbed children we have good reason to believe need spe- cial intervention. Our present policy does not take into consideration the arbitrary nature of the definition of emotional disturbance. It ignores the fact that most disturbed children can be classified as disturbed or normal for administrative convenience or out of necessity. It is blind to the fact that there are neither resources of money nor of trained personnel to serve all children who could reasonably be identified as disturbed. And it re- lies almost totally on coercion, on threatened negative consequences, to obtain a semblance of compliance with the law, a contingency system certain to foster avoidance or denial. It forces school officials to close their eyes to the nceds of children if they haven't the resources to serve them, because to recognize the need without providing the appropriate service is to risk losing everything in the way of federal support. The pol- icy is analogous to telling the destitute parents of a large family of hungry children who are receiving grants of food that they must feed all their children well, for if it is folind that one of the children is hungry and not being fed, then all t!Ie food grants.will be w:thheld. Under such circum- stances, what would rational parents do if they had a hungry child and no more food? Probably they would vehemently denytheir child's hunger to any inquIrer. It is tiagic that our current social policyregarding education of the handicapped :s not more humane and consistent with principles of positive behavior maaagement.

A report of the U. S. General Accounting Office published in September 1981, Disparities Still Exist in Who Gets Special Education, indicated that special edu- cation services for the majority of emotionally disturbed children areinadequate or nonexistent.

1 6 Kauffman

Social policy could be changed to support the growth of services for the emotionally disturbed (and services for other categories of mildly handi- cappe(l as well). Such a policy change should involve removal of the re- quirement of service for every child who has been identified as handi- capped. Threats of withdrawal of funds or of other sanctions would be reserved for those cases in which there was an obvious lack of good faith effort to identify and serve disturbed children. Incentives for serving identified children would be provided. Such a policy would not guaran- tee service to all handicapped children. But as we have seen, such a pol- icy change would be no great loss because the guarantee of appropriate service for every disturbed child is by necessity a sham. A moie realiStic and positive approach is to set goals and reward approximations of achieving them,

Policies On Intervention, Training, and Research

All indications are that the majority of emotionally disturbed children are not being served by special education (Kauffman, 1980, 1981a, b). Most of them remain in regular classes with regular teachers who have no special training in how to deal with persistently disordered behavior. Under these circumstances it may seem necessary to formulate policies regard- ing intervention strategies, personnel preparation, and research. But Until the more fundamental issues of definition and mandated services are re- solved, other issues are academic. Here, too, one faces a great dilemma: Lack of a clear policy may have negative effects, but even a well-inten- tioned policy also can have very undesirable outcomes. Social policy, as embodied in the law and judicia.l process and behavioral science appear to have the common goal of enhancing the social order, but they often come into conflict in practice; and legal victories ostensibly based on sci- entific evidence can have adverse effects on the very individuals they were designed to benefit (Baumeister, 1981; Townsend & Mattson, 1981). Thus, good intentions on the part of policy makers and behavioral scien- tists do not guarantee an ultimate outcome that is beneficial. Townsend and Mattson (1981) have suggested that in the development of policy regarding the rights of the handicapped one must consider several interconnected sources of information and opinion: public attitudes, per- sonal satisfaction, science and technology, laws and judicial interpreta- tions, and political coalitions. To the extent that any one of these sources and its relationships to the others are ignored, social policy is likely to be unsuccessful. In the area of emotional disturbance as well as in special education in general, we have not fully considered the complexity of the problems we face in formulating policy that will be maximally beneficial. Instead, we have rushed headlong into policies that are well intentioned but cannot work because they fail to account for the realities of others' per.ceptions, needs, and capabilities. To make recommendations here re- garding what policy we should formulate for intervention strategies, per-

8 17 Social Policy

sonnel preparation, and research would be foolhardy. But it is safe to say that in formulating such policy it would be prudent to think more care- fully than we have in the past about the interests, , and likely reactions oy people outside our professional enclave.

Reference List

Baumeister, A. A. The right to habilitation: What does it mean? Analysis and Intervention in Developnwntal 19L I, I, 6-1-74. Blatt, B. Toward an understanding of people with special needs. In J. NI. Kauffman & J. S. Payne (Eds.), Mental retardation: Introduction and personal perspectives. Columbus, 011:

Charles E. Merrill Publishing Company. 1975. . Bower, E. NI. Early identification of enwtionally handicapped children in school (2nd ed.). Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, Publisher, 1969.

Bower. E. NI. Defining emotional disturbance: Public policy and research. in the Sihools, 1982. 19. 55-60.

Grosenick. J. K. & Iluntze, S. L. National needs analysis in behavior disorders. Columbia: Uni- versity of Missouri, Department of Special Education, 1979.

llobbs, N. (Ed.). &SUM in the classification of children (Vols, 1 & 2). San FranciSco: Jossey- Bass. Inc., Publishers, 1975. (a)

Hobbs, N. The futures of children. San Francisco: Jassey-Bass, Inc., Publishers. 1975. (b) Kauffman, J. NI. An historical perspective on disordered behavior and an alternative concep- tualization of iixceptionality. In F. 11. Wood & K. C. Lakin (Eds.), Disturbing, disordered, or dkturbed? Perspectives on the definition of problem behavior in educational settings. Min- neapolis: University of Minnesota, Department of Psychoeducational Studies. 1979.. Kauffman, J. M. Where special education for disturbed children is going: A personal view. Exceptional Children, 1980, 46, 522-527. Kauffman, I. M. Characteristics of children's behavior disorders (2nd ed.). Columbus. 011: Charles E. Merrill Publishing Company, 1981. (a) Kauffman, J. M. llistorical trends and contemporary issues in special education in the United States, In J. M. Kauffman & D. P. l'Iallahan (Eds.), Handbook of special education. Engle- wood Cliffs. NJ: Prentice-I lall, Inc.. 1981. (b)

Kauffman, J. M. & Kneedler, R. D. Behavior disorders. In J. M. Kauffman & D. P. Hallahan (Eds.), Handbook of special education. Englewood Cliffs. NJ: PEentice-lIall, Inc., 1981, Magliocca. L. A. & Stephens, T. M, Child identification or child inventory? A critique of the federal design of child- identification systems implemented under PL 94-142. Journal of Special Education. 1980, 14, 23-36.

Rhodes, W. C. & flead, S. (Eds.). A study of child variance (Vol. 3: Service delivery systems), Ann Arbor: University of Michigan. 1974. Rhodes, W, C. & Paul, J. L, Emotionally disturbed and deviant children: New views and ap- proaches. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, Inc., 1978.

Rhodes, W. C. & Tracy, M. L. (Eds.). A study of child variance (Vol. 1: Theories). Ann Arbor: University of Michigan, 1972. (a) Kauffman

Rhodes. W. C. & Fracy. NIL. 14:ds 1 study of child viirmin1Vol. 2: Intyryvnlionsi. Aim Arbor. University of Nlichig4n. 1972.1b1

-From madness to inent,11 illness Nleilit.,11 men ,is moral ifilln.prenifiirs. hivrs Voiropt.an Soi iplogy. 1975. 16. 218-251.

.1ownstwil. N1,114rm. Rliii interaction of latv spifcial vducation, Observing the eon- ',ernes new clothes. Annlysis IffitToTillI011 111 Disubilotivs. 1981. 1. 75- 89.

Eilticdtion I)tju,urtnuooutFmmtmouul RegistiT, 42 (1634 I Vashington hG S. Printing Off it.v. August 2:1, 1977.

E")

10 Assessment of Behavior Disorders in the School Setting: Issues, Problems, and Strategies

Hill M. Walker

Issues in assessment of mild behavior disorders in the school setting are myriad, complex, and increasingly controversial. It is no easy task to de- velop a rationale for the inclusion or exclusion of specific issues on this topic. The author used a combination of the following criteria Ao select general content areas and specific issues within them. The areas and is- sues selected 1) have direct implications for the assessment of behavior disorders in the school setting; 2) possess some degree of professional salience within the educational or psychological literatures; 3) influence, constrain, and/or mediate actual assessment practice, and 4) are contro- versial in that there seems to be divergent prbfessional opinion regarding their definition and/or resolution. This paper will discuss isSues, problems, and strategies within two major areas (e.g., conceptual and procedural) relating to the assessment of mild behavior disorders in children. The content of the paper will not be treated in an unbiased or objective fashion. The author will advocate for specific positions, points of view, and actual practice that, in his opinion, have the potential to positively influence current practices in the assess- ment of mild behavior disorders. It is not expected that the material in this paper will contribute directly to enduring professional consensus on the issues presented. Nor will clear-cut solutions be provided to the com- plex problems of definition, classification measurement practice that have plagued the field of behavior disorders for so long. Rather, a major goal of this paper is to examine and call into question many of the as-

11 Walker

sumptions that have guided our practices in relation to the meastuament of child behavior disorders in the school setting and that determine the 'type aml quality of service., eventually delivered to such children. In the author's view, many of these assuMptions prevent us from developing bases for change in our assessment practices which will more function- ally serve the needs of behavior disordered chiklren in the school setting. Before turning to a discussion of specific issues, it seems appropriate to examine the current state of assessment and service, delivery practices for behavior disordered chiklren and to speculate upon why such a dileinma exists in this general area.

Current State cif Assessment and Service Delivery Practices

There seems to be general agreement in the educational community that . availableeligibility criteria and assessment procedures.are pot adequate to the tasks of reliably separating behavior disordered from non-behavior- disordered children and deciding which identified children are in need of existing services. It is apparent that the field of behavior disorders has been and continues to be at a severe programmatic disadvantage. This is . due to an inability to reach a professional consensus regarding a defini: tion of its subject matter and legitimate qualifications of individuals for services. Technologies exist to screen, identify, measure, and remediate the broad range of behavior disorders encountered in the school setting. floweVer, because of competing models of human behavior, psychologi- cal assessment, and therapy, and a reliance upon medically based, clini- cally oriented definitional and classification systems that often have only limited applicability to the school setting, the field has exhibited a kind of paralysis and ambivalence regarding its legitimate domains of activity. Children in general, and especially behavior .disordered children, have not been well served by this dilemma. The real tragedy of our profes- sional immobility is that many children with legitimate behavior disor- ders are frequently denied access to servides that could significantly af- fect their educational adjustment and social development because they do not fit vaguely defined eligibility criteria and categories of emotional/ behavioral disability. What is an emotionally disturbed or behavior disordered child? The an- swer depends (among other things) upon who is asked, and his or her particular philosophical orientation regarding human behavior and psy- chopathology. Unfortunately, professionals have been unable to agree on a precise use of terms such as emotional disturbance and behavior disor- ders (Balow, 1979). For reasons relating to matters of substance and phi- losophy as well as clarity, the term "behavior disorders" will be used whenever possible in the remainder of this paper to refer to the full range of disorders, problems, and disturbances of child behavior commonly en- countered in the school setting. 21 12 Assessment of Behavior Disorders

The school system has had, and continues to have, great difficulty in de- ciding its proper role in relation to child behavior disorders. This prob- lem has been compounded by definitional vagueness, conflicting support service demands front teachers and other school professionals, and terri- torial imperatives relating to professional legitimacy and competence. There is, however, an increasing trend for school systems to provide for the full range of needs and service demands of this population of chil- dren. This is probably a function of at least three developments: 1) the passage of PL 94-142, 2) an improving technology for delivery of high quality therapeutic services in the school setting, and 3) the publication of efficacy studies of non-school-based mental health services for chil- dren which tend to show weak effects on child behavior in the school setting (Achenbach, 1974; Levitt, 1971; Sheperd, Oppenheim, & Mitchell, 1971). Schools have also experienced great difficulty in distinguishing disci-, pline problems from behavior disorders and subsequently in deciding- how to deal with them in a programmatic sense. At present we do not have the classification taxonomies or measurement strategies that will al- low 1.18 to make these discriminations with,precision and reliability. If a child is perceived as a discipline problem,' he or she is likely to be ex- posed to a punishment or control strategy. In contrast, if the same child is perceived as having a behavior disorder or as being emotionally dis- turbed, a therapeutic regimen of some type is the most likely responscto the problem (Neel & Rutherford, 1981). Itis apparent that definitignal cri- teria and assessment procedures play a powerful role in determining a school system's response to dysfunctional child behavior, with equally powerful implications for the children involved. Another factor that could account for our imprecision in assessing and rernediating behavior disorders in the school setting is the failure;to dis- tinguish between dysfunctional child behavior in school and nonschool settings. Traditionally, schools have adopted a medically based, clinical perspective in the definition, assessment, diagnosis, and treatment of be- havior disorders in children. Dysfunctional or pathological behavior is seen as specific to, and originating within, the child. Behavioral and emo- tional difficulties are viewed as stable phenomena that are relatively in- variant across settings (Ullthann & Krasner, 1965). The most recent edi- tion of the American Psychiatric Association's Diagnostic and Statistical Manual (1980), however, does acknowledge that symptoms of such phe- nomemi in childhood disorders are differentially displayed across set-, tings. Advocates of this viewpoint have suggested that a diagnosis of behav- ioraLemotional difficulty in one specific setting (e.g., school) has no va- lidity unless manifestations of it are also observed in a variety of other settings (e.g., home, community, clinician's office). Rarely are such disor- ders considered setting specific when viewed .from either a "states and traits" model of personality (Allport, 1966, 1974), or from a medical "dis- ease" model of psychopathology (Ullmann & Krasner,. 1965, 1969). In-

13 22 Walker

creasing evidence, however, is suggesting that both pathological and non- pathological forms of behavior, are, to a large extent, situation specific (Johnson, Boldstad, & Lobitz, 1976; Mischel, 1968, 1969; Wahler, 1969; Walker, Hops, & Johnson, 1975). Given that such is the case, there are at least four possibilities relating to the interaction between setting and the actual presence or absence of disordered child behavior. That is, children can be disordered at school only, in nonschool settings only, in both school and nonschool settings, and in neither. Schools and the behavior disordered children they serve could potentially benefit greatly from the development of definitional, classification, and assessment model's; whose content is focused on child behavior in the school setting, as op- posed to continued reliance on generic, setting-nonspecific systems whose content is frequently determined by a mixture of parent, teacher, and clinician's ratings. Such a system could facilitate decision making relating to identification, service delivery, and reMediation within the school setting, as well as referral of children to clinical facilities and re- sources external to the school setting. In the author's opinion, the factors discussed above account for many of our problems in serving behavior disordered children in scbe- : settings. Further, these factors are largely contextual in nature. That;, they are a function of attitudes, assump- tions, expectations, and beliefs (relating to human behavior and its causes) that we have been taught tc view as valid, true, and appropriate. In the author's view, these contextual variables are at the core of our prob- lems in serving behavior disordered children because they influence the kinds of assessment, classification, and service delivery decisions we make as professionals. Unfortunately, variables of this type often control the assessment process in ways that do not serve the best interest of be- havior disordered children who are in need of direct services. A fuller explication of these variables and their programmatic implications will be presented in the sections that follow.

Conceptual Issues

Divergent conceptualizations of human behavior, the etiology of emo- tionalhehavioral disorders, and classification systems have had a power- ful influence upon the assessment of behavior disorders in the school set- ting. The types of assessment procedures chosen (projective tests, teacher or parent ratings, behavioral role play tests, interviews, or(lirect observa- tions in the natural setting), the setting(s) in which assessments are made (school versus home, natural setting versus clinician's office), and the in- terpretation of the results, are all directly influenced by such conceptual- izations. At present, there appears to be little hope of a professional con- sensus regarding such conceptualizations and with it,standardization of practice and decision making. The only consensus seems to be that every- one is dissatisfied with the traditional efforts atdefining, classifying, and identifying emotional/behavioral disorders in children (Wood & Lakin, 1979). 2 :3

14 Assessment of Behavior Disorders

Some major conceptual issues that impinge upon the assessment of school behavior disorders are: 1) the continued use of vague constructs such as emotional disturbance to refer to disordered child behavior; 2) reliance upon conceptualizations of disordered child behavior in school which are not specific to that setting; 3) the influence of models of per- sonality upon conceptualizations of child behavior; 4) the influence of classification systems upon conceptualizations of disordered behavior in the school setting; 5) the influence of setting and behavioral expectations dpon child behavior; 6) the role of social agents' tok rance levels in defin- ing disordered child behavior; and 7) criteria for determining disordered behavior in the school setting. These issues and their implications for the assessment process will be discussed further.

Emotional Disturbance Versus Behavior Disorders The school system's adoption of the term emotional disturbance to de- scribe children who experience disorders of behavioral functioning is unfortunate. Use of the term focuses the attention of educators upon emo- tional antecedents to disordered behavioral functioning and leads to a search for child-specific etiological factors, via the assessment process, to account for the behavioral problems in question. In those cases in which such causal agents are thought to be identified via assessment procedures or clinical judgment, their programmatic implications for educators are often extremely limited and sometimes absolve them of any responsibili- ties for remediation. We would do well to restrict our assessment efforts to overt, observable dimensions of child behavior and to assess it within those settings where it is perceived to be disordered. A measurement strategy of this type fo- cuses our attention upon the child's learning history, competence or skill level, situatitinal demands and expectations, and environmental contin- gencies as possible causal agents. A number of investigators have urged that conceptualizations of disordered child behavior be based upon di- rect observation of overt behavior rather than clinical inference (Cbrizio & McCoy, 1976; Freemont & Wallbrown, 1979; Quay, 1972: Ross, 1971; Walker, 1979). Unless criteria can be developed which will reliably distinguish emotion- ally disturbed 'from behavior disordered children, the author recom- mends that we discontinue use of the term emotional disturbance. Fur- ther, the term behavior disorders should be reserved for describing disordered child behavior that can be observed and assessed reliably in those settings where it is judged to be a problem.

School Versus Nonschool Conceptualizations of Child Be- havior Traditional conceptualizations of child behavior disorders are rarely set-

15 2 zi Walker

ting specific, perhaps because behavior disorders are thought not to be setting specific:. School systems have relied upon conceptualizations of disordered child behavior supplied by the medical and clinical profes- sions which are generic in nature and do not take performance within specific settings into account. The relevance of substantial portions of these conceptualization systems for school-related behavior disorders is obscure. Until recently, however, educators have rarely questioned their utjlity or content. It can be argued, for example, that stimulus conditions, performance de- mands and behavioral expectations, and social relationships are radically different in the school and home setting. Dtsordered child behavior in these two settings may be quite different in both form and content. In those cases in which a child's behavior pattern is disordered in both the school and home settings, there is no guarantee that specific behavior problems will be identical in the two settings or that they are a function of the same causal factors. Separate conceptualizations are needed for child behavior in the school setting. The specific content of each conceptual- ization should be determined by direct measures of child behavior within the setting, by information on the characteristics and performance de- mands of the setting, and by the perceptions of key social agents (teachers versus parents) within the setting regarding child behavior inthat setting. In the author's view, a school-based conceptualization should focus equally upon educational and social development. Child behavior prob- lems should be identified which can compete with development in each of these major areas and measurement strategies should be developed which can assess their occurrence in natural settings. Such strategies would include, at a minimum, teacher ratings of child behavior and di- rect observations recorded in the appropriate setting(s).

The Influence of Models of Personality Upon Conceptualizations of Child Behavior There are numerous theories of personality which purport to account for both normal and abnormal behavior. Conceptualizations of psychopa- thology and have traditionally developed from theories of personality (Hyman, Bilus, Dennehy, Feldman, Flanagan, Lovoratano, Maitul, & Mc:Dowell, 1979). Ultimately such theories have a powerful in- fluence upon one's v;ew of child behavior disorders, for example, how they are defined, acquired, measured, and remediated. Rarely are such theories either experientially or empirically based. Further, they describe personality development processes in broad, generic; terms, with the home setting viewed as having the greatest influence in the social and personal dtwelopment of the child. Many explanations have been promulgated to account for the instruc- tional process, and impressive efforts have been mounted to develop a unified theory of instruction (Bruner. 1968). In the area of child behavior 25 16 Assessment of Behavior Disorders

and social development in the school setting, however, we have relied upon psychology and psychiatry to provide explanations for us via per- sonality theory. Hyman et aL (1979) describe five models oi -personality which have most influenced educators' conceptualizations of disordered behavior in the school setting. These are:1) psychodynamic-inter- personal, 2) behavioral, 3) sociological, 4) eclectic- ecological, and 5) hu- manistic. These theories provide "windows on the world" for school professionals serving children with behavior disorders. The same behavioral phenom- ena can be described, analyzed, and interpreted using each of these dif- ferent models, and it is likely that radically different explanations of the problem will be offered by professionals subscribing to each theory. In some respects these theories have done more harm than good in terms of our efforts to develop effective interventions and services for behavior disordered children in the school setting. Some of their more deleterious functional effects have been to: 1) focus our attention on alleged causal variables that are either specific to the child or external to the school set- ting; 2) cause us to seek explanations of disordered child behavior within the realm of intrapsychic, nonobservable phenomena, rather than to ana- lyze child performance within the context in which it is judged to be problematic; 3) causAis to give up on problem amelioration as a function of the discovery of causal variables that are viewed as too deeply imbed- ded in the personality to be responsive to change procedures; 4) influence us, as educators, to apply indirect methods of treatment (e.g., verbal psy- chotherapies) to produce changes in overt behavior patterns (aggression, social withdrawal, conduct problems); 5) provide support and encourage- ment for the continued use of projective ..:sessment methods with behav- ior disordered children as a veh; 'e foaxplaining why the behavior problem exists and for deciding upon appropriate therapies (the validity of these methods for both purposes is extremely limited); and 6) influ- ence us to view problematic child behavior in terms of trait labels (e.g., devious, manipulative, aggressive, obsessive) which suggest stable mani- festations of the trait label or attribute across settings and time. School systems are in need of a theory of chiltbehavior and school ps:,- chopathology which is both experientially and 'empirically based. It should focus on overt, observable child behavior in the school setting, that is, on what children say and do, not what they think and feel. The content of this theory should be generated by such variables as: 1) the interactions that occur between children and school social agents (peers and teachers); 2) the characteristics of the school setting and opportnni- ties it provides for social and educational development; 3) the perfor- mance demands and behavioral expectations of school personnel; 4) the tolerance levels of classroom, teachers in defining and labeling deviance; 5) the role of the home and school settings in either -producing and/or maintaining disordered child behavior; 6) constraints of the school sys- tem in serving behavior disordered children; 7) effective therapies and interventions for different types of behavior disorders common to the sthool setting, and 8) taxonomies and classification systems that describe

172 6 Walker

school-related behavior disorders. If such a theo6 Were "developed. we would be in a far better position to deliver cohesive, relevant, and cost- effective services to behavior disordered children whfch wouId have some likelihood of directly affecting their social.,and educational devel- opment in the school. setting.

The Influence of Classification,Systems Upon Conceptualization of Child Behavior in School Clasfication systems for describing psychopathology and disbrdered functioning abcund in the clinical literature. In 1966, the Committee on Child Psychiatry of the Group for the AdVancement of Psychiatry noted that at least 24 different systems had been prdposed for classifying the behavior disorders of childhood (Freemont & Wallbrown, 1979). The most current edition of the American. Ilychiatric Association's Diagnos- tic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM) (1980) devotes an entire section to the disorders of infancy, childhood', and adolescence. Clearly our problem is not, and has not been, a lack of ayailable systems for classifying child behavior disorders. Rather,, our classification prob- lems have been in the areas of 11 relevance of content to the schoOl situa- tion; 2) diagnostic precision based on the criteria contained in such sys- tems; 3t ab,ility of such systems to identify homogeneous groupings nf children with specific behavior disorders who may or may not share com- mon etiologies; 4) use of such systems as a basis for comparing different interventions for-the same behavior disorder, and 5) ability of such sys- tems to prescribe measurement strategies, othemhan clinical judgment, for assessing child status on specific disorders. Traditional classification systems have generally failed in each of the aforementioned areas. Other criticisms that have been leveled at theth in- clude lack of specificity, failure to include developmental perspectives, failure to distinguish c:hild from adult disorders, failure to specify sex- related and age-related behavior disorders, and failure to be consistent in classification criteria (Achenbach, 1978, 1979; Achenbach & Edelbrock, 1978; Freernont & Wallbrown. 1979; Reichler & Schopler, 1976). Reichler and Schopler (1976) suggest that classification should provide a basis for prevention, prescription, and 'prognosis. the three functions of diagnosis. No classification or diagnostic Syqem currently available pro- vides for these functions in relation to childhood behavior disorders in the school setting. This goal is not likely to be attained until systems are developed which are based upon the ratings or judgments of key social agents in the school §etting (teachers, , peers. professionally trained observers) in relation to behavioral descriptions of what children say and do in that setting. The primary content sources for the development of traditional classifica- tion systems Wave been the clinical judgment(s) of mental health profes- sionals, cataloguing of presenting symptoms of children spen in child

18 Assessment of Behavior Disorders

guidance clinics and other mental health settings, and parent and teacher ratings. Parent and teacher ratings have been sampled to a substantially lesser degree in traditional systems than have clinical judgment and ca- taloguing of symptoms.

The 1980 DSM classification system is perhaps most representative of the types of childhood disorders identified when clinical judgment is the pri- mary content source. The system contains five major groupings distin- guished from each other by predominant area of disturbance. These are presented in Table 1.

Table 1 - (1980) DSM Childhood Disorders 1. Intellectual Mental Retardation 2. Behavior (Overt) Attention Deficit Disorder Conduct Disorder 3. Emotional Anxiety Disorders of Childhood or Ac )lescence Other Disorders of Infancy, Chfidhood, lr Adolescence 4. Physical Eating Disorders Stereotyped Movement Disorders Other Disorders with Physical Manifestations 5. Developmental Pervasive Developmental Disorders Specific Developmental Disorders Note: From Diagnostic and statistical manual of rnehtal disorders (3rd ed.) by the American Psychiatric Association,4980. Copyright 1980 by American Psychiatric Association,. Reprinted by permission. With the exception of the categories under Behavioral (Overt), the disor- ders represented by these major groupings have only limited reference to the kinds of behavior disorders and adjustment problems children ex- hibit at school and which disrupt educational or social development, yet this system is used extensively by school professionals in diagnosing and classifying child behavior disorders in the school setting. The author is not denying the generalized validity of these disordersjust their rele- vance for the task of identifying and prescribing for behavior disorders at school. Numerous studies in the published literature have reported attempts to develop empirically based classification systems for child behavior disor- ders (Becker & Krug, 1964; Kulik, Stein, & Sarbin, 1968; Patterson, 1964; Phillips, 1968; Quay, 1964, 1972; Ross, Lacey, & Parton, 1965; Walker, 1970). As a rule, these studies have factor-analyzed ratings of child be- havior by teachers, parents, and clinicians in an attempt to isolate homo:

19 28 Walker

geneous behavioral groupings for diagnostic and treatment prescription purposes. The number of factors identified in these studies has varied from two to as many as thirteen (Peterson, 1965; Spivack & Swift, 1966). Systems of this type generally have much greater relevance for school- rated behavior disorders than the more traditional models based largely upon clinical judgment. There appears to be substantial commonality among the factors reported in these studies. Few studies have been reported in which standardized intervention pro- cedures have been developed explicitly for use with homogenous group- ings of children representative of factor-analytically derived behavior disorders. The work of the author and his colleagues at the Center at Ore- gon for Research in the BehaVior Education of the Handicapped (COR- BEH) (1971-79) is a case in point (Walker, 1977; Walker, Hops, & Green- wood, 1976; Walker & Hops, 1979). Over an eight-year period, they developed, tested, and validated four comprehensive behavior manage- ment packages for use with commonly encountered school behavior dis- orders. Each package contains specific identification criteria and mea- surement instruments/procedufes for use in screening, assessment, and program evaluation. These packages are designed respectivelyfor use with acting out, low academic survival skill, socially withdrawn, and so- cially aggressive children. More work of this type needs to be conducted so that an array of standardized intervention procedures/programswill be available to school pfofessionals in providing for the needs of behavior disordered children. In the last few years, some positive and potentially very useful work has occurred in the area of developing empirically based classification sys- tems that are increasingly applicable to school-relaled behavior disorders (Achenbach, 1978, 1979; Achenbach & Edelbrock, 1978; Freemont & Wallbrown, 1979; Ross, 1980; Schaefer, in press). This work has been geared toward specific school behavior problems in some cnstances (Freemont & Wallbrown, 1979). Other investigators have distinguished behavioral content, rating instruments, and empirically derived clusters for school versus home settings (Edelbrock, 1979). Further, Achenbach and Edelbrock (1978) and Eclelbrock (1979) have identified behavioral clusters and classification systems that are specific to sex and age levels. This work recognizes that the content of specific behavior disorders is often quite different for males and females and that the behavior prob- lems children experience show some change across age levels. Freemont and Wallbrown (1979) review different systems for categoriz- ing learning and behavioral problems from the standpoint of whether they involve behavioral content that can be observed in the classroom or depend upon psychological constructs inferred by mental health special- ists. The authors suggest a school-specific classification system for use in diagnosis, assessment, and treatment prescription that consists of seven behavior patterns. Quay's (1972) system of four behavioral clusters is sub- sumed by Freemont and Wallbrown because they view them as represen- tative of stable behavior patterns that are observable and that can be rated 29 20 Assessment of Behavior Disorders

reliably in the classroom. The seven patterns are: 1) personality prob- lems, 2) conduct problems, 3) immature, inadequate behavior, 4) social- ized delinquency, 5) severe emotional disturbances,6)social mispercep- tion, and 7)learning disabilities. The latter three categories were included to provide coverage of major areas of problematic functioning not addressed by the Quay system. The positive features of this work are that the authors have attempted to produce a classification system based upon observable classroom behavior that is specific to the school setting.

Several investigators have argued for the validity of bipolar classifica- tions of disordered child behavior (Achenbach & Edelbrock,1978;Edel- brock,1979; Ross, 1980;Schaefer, in press). Ross (1980), in reviewing the available evidence and work on classification of child psychopathology, suggests that a strong case can be made for reducing existing behavioral clusters, factors, or patterns to a bipolar dimension that characterizes the, direction of disordered behavior, that is, either toward or away from the environment. This dimem ,on has been variously conceptualized as 1) ex- cessive approach behavior (aggression) versus excessive avoidance be- havior (withdrawal), 2) conduct problems versus personality problems, and 3) internalizing (problems with self) versus externalizing (problems with the environment). Achenbach and Edelbrock(1978)and Edelbrock (1979)note that in spite of the diversity of rating instruments, raters, set- tings, and studies reported in the literature, there is strong evidence for the existence of such a bipolar conceptualization of child behavior disor- ders. This bipolar conceptualization has a great deal of relevance for the treatment of school-based child behavior disorders.

Ross (1980) suggests that behavior which our society defines as disor- dered or problematic falls into two major classes, depending on whether the behavior deviates from the norm by occurring too larely or too fre- quently. For example, behavior disordered children are usually either de- ficient in appropriate adaptive skills and competenc:es that contribute to satisfactory educational and social development and/or they engage ex- cessively in maladaptive, inappropriate behavior that competes with such development and is outside the referring agent's range of tolerance. On the one hand, we are dealing with insufficient levels.,of behavior which call for an acceleration intervention to build in the agired skills, competencies, or behavioral responses. In contrast, excessive levels of maladaptive behavior usually require a deceleration procedure designed to reduce or eliminate specific pinpoints. The CORBEH behavior manage- ment packages referred to previously are divided equally into this dicho- tomy. For example, the Program for Academic Survival Skills (PASS) and Procedures for Establishing. Effective Relationship Skills (PEERS) pro- grams are concerned respegtively with building academic survival skills and adaptive social skills among populations of school children deficient in them. In contrast, the (CLASS) Contingencies for Learning Academic and Social Skills and (RECESS) Reprogramming Environmental Contin- gencies for Effective Social Skills programs focus respectively upon the reduction of acting out and aggressive behavior to within normal limits

21 30 Walker

among children who are outside the normal range on these behavior pat- terns. Assessment methodologies geared toward children with mild behavior disorders would benefit from adoption of this simple bipolar classifica- tion system. Such methodologies would be tied directly to treatment pre- scription processes and the selection of appropriate services for rernedia- tion of specific disorders and behavior patterns. It would also be possible to establish normative levels of performance or behavior patterns repre- dtentative of this dichotomy for use in both screening and treatment evalu- ' ation tasks (Walker & Hops, 1976). Finally, surnmative rneasurescof per- formance such as sociometric status and achievement level could be used as validation criteria for selecting intervention target skills and compe- tencles, that would have a maximum impact upon child development and school adjustment (Foster & Ritchey, 1979). -

The Influence of Setting and Behavioral Expectations Upon Child Behavior Observers of child behavior across a variety of settings are continually impressed with how different child behavior can be in terms of content, level, topography, and form from setting to setting. Mischel (1968, 1969) has provided an eloquent conceptualization of the situational specificity of human behavior. 'This specificity doubtless reflects strong differences between settings (e.g., home versus school, classroom to classthom, play- ground versus classroom) on such variables as 1) the stimulus conditions, setting events, and behavioral contingencies that exist within them; 2) the behavioral/performance expectations of social agents in the setting; and 3) the tolerance levels of such agents for problematic, maladaptive, or dis- ordered child behavior. The extent to which each of these variables con- tributes to the definition and labeling of child behavior as problematic is presently not known. It is well established, however, that children who are labeled as mildly behavior disordered by oneteacher are not so per- ceived by all teachers to whom they are exposed. The more extreme the behavior disorder, the more likely it is that such consistency in labeling will be observed. In the author's opinion, the teacher's behavioral expec- tations play a major role in this process and subsequently affect teacher- child interactions in a direct manner. The work of Brophy and Good (1970, 1974), for example, provides com- pelling evidence that classroom teachers not only hold differential per- formance expectations for children in their classes, but that they commu- nicate them behaviorally. In their sample, teachers demanded better performance from those children for whom they had higher expectations, and were more likely to praise such performance when it was elicited. In contrast, they were more likely to accept poor performance from students for whom they held low expectations, and were less likely to praise good performance from those students when it occurred. It is conceivable that teachers hold equally well-developed standards and expectations for 31 22 Assessment of Behavior Disorders

adaptive and maladaptive types of child social behavior with clearly dif- ferentiated treatment of children whose behavior patterns fall within and outside them. The author is currently engaged in research on the mainstreaming pro- cess (Walker, 1979) which systematically takes the receiving teacher's so- cial behavior standards and expectations into account in the placement and integration process. The author has developed and begun the valida- tion and standardization of two instruments for use in measuring this variable. The first instrument requires the teacher to make rating judg- ments in relation to 56 descriptions of adaptive skills and competencies that contribute to success in the classroom and 51 descriptions of mala- daptive behavioral pinpoints that disrupt or interfere with satisfactory classroom adjustment. A second instrument contains correlates of child handicapping conditions that may cause resistance to the placement/inte- gration process. These instruments have generalized applicability to the task of assessing teacher expectancy effects in relation to mild behavior disorders in the school setting. Whenever possible, the teacher's expecta- tions should be assessed in the process of evaluating child behavior in any given setting for the purpose of determining whether it is disordered. The author has found tremendous variability among samples of both regular and special education teachers in terms of their social behavio. standards and expectations. Such variability has powerful implications for the screening, placement, and treatment of behavior disorders in the school setting.

The Role of Social Agents' Tolerance Levels in Defining Disordered Child Behavior Although behavioral expectations and standards obviously play an im- portant role in the assessment of p'roblematic child behavior on a case-by- case basis, the tolerance levels of classroom teachers may play an even more direct role in this process. Ullman and Krasner (19691 and Ross (1980) have all emphasized the important role that the tolerance levels of social agents play in defining child behavior as abnormal or disordered. In fact, Ullman and Krasner (1969) note: Behavior which is called abnormal must be studied as the interaction of three variables: the behavior itself, its social context, and an observer who is in a posi- tion of power. No specific behavior is abnormal in itself. Rather, an individual may do something (e.g., verbalize hallucinations, hit a person, collect rolls of toilet paper, refuse to eat, stutter, stare into space, or dress sloppily) under a set of circumstances (e.g., during a school class, while working at his desk, during a church service) which upsets, annoys, angers, or strongly disturbs somebody (e.g., employer, teacher, parent, or the individual himself) sufficiently that some action results (e.g., a policeman is called., seeing a psychiatrist is recommended, commitment proceedings ,are startedJ so that the society's professional labelers (e.g., physicians, psychiatrists, psychologists, judges, social workers) come into contact with the individual and determine which of the current sets of labels (e.g., schizophrenic reaction, sociopathic personality, anxiety reaction) is most appropriate. (p. 21)

23 32 Walker

Exce:pt for the examples, settings, and agents used by the authors, they may as well have been discussing behavior problems and disorders of children in the school setting.

Behavior disorders cannot be judged in isolation. The context in which the problematic behavior occurs and social agents' judgments of it must be taken into account systematically in the evaluation process. Ross (1980) notes that tolerance levels of social agents in natural settings (par- ents, teachers) may have to change in certain instancesotherwise a child is asked to adjust to an intolerable situation.

It is likely that classroom teachers' tolerance levels would show the same degree of variability as do their expectations of child performance and social behavior. Teachers likely also show diffeiences among themselves in terms of their tolerance for types of child behavior and the age at which certain child behaviors are exhibited. Studies of the referral process show that teachers are much more likely to refer hyperactive, aggressive, dis- ruptive children than they are withdrawn, phobic, or depressed children. Doubtless, one reason for this is that teachers are generally much less to- lerant of disruptive, acting out forms of child behaviorperhaps because disorders of this type place severe pressures upon the management and instructional skills of most teachers. What does this mean in a practical sense? It means that many children with nondisruptive behavior disor- ders are much,less likely to be referred and placed in contact with needed services. It prObably also means that many children with minh.-al reper- toires of acting out or disruptive behavior are referred and labeled who should not be. Therefore, we should not rely exclusively upon teacher referral processes to define children who are in need of behavioral ser- vices. Screening procedures have been developed which require each child to be evaluated by teachers on a regular basis for specific learning or behavioralproblems (Greenwood, Waiker, Todd, & Hops, 1979a; Kirschenbaum, Marsh, & Devage, 1977). Additional work needs to be done in this area to develop cost-effective, mass screening methods that take advantage of the power and sensitivity of teacher judgment in identi- fying learning and behavior problems.

Increasing calls have been made for educators to distinguish between dis- turbed child behavior and behavior that is disturbing (Tewksberry, Note 1). This notion has considerable face validity. However, if Ullmann and Krasner (1969) and Ross (1980) are correct in their conceptualizations of child behavior, the perceptions of social agents in the child's environ- ment (parents, teachers) are an integral part of the process used to define behavior as problematic or disordered. If this is true, then it really may not be possible to make such a distinction reliably. Further, we may not want to. If a given child's behavior is viewed by a teacher as problematic and disturbing, is that child at any less risk than one whose behavior is viewed as disordered but not disturbing? One could make a convincing argument that educational adjustment and/or social development of both children may be equally impaired.

24 Assessment of Behavior Disorders

The response of educators should be identical in both situations. That is, careful assessments should be made of the child's behavior, the social context in which the problems exist and the teacher's tolerance level and expectations in order to determine appropriate alternatives. In many in- stances, both child behavior and teacher expectations may have to change to resolve the problemin other cases, only behavior or teacher expecta- tions. There are massive logistical barriers involved in changing teacher expectations or tolerance levels. There will be' many instances in which the only alternatives will be either to change the child's behavior to meet teacher standards or to change placements. Unless we adopt a truly eco- logical approach to the assessment of child behavior disorders in the school setting, however, we will only be dealing with pieges of the over- all problem. The continuing practice of evaluating child behavior disor- ders in isolation from their social context and ignoring the behavioral im- plications of social agents' perceptions of them, cannot, in the author's opinion, be defended.

Criteria for Determining Disordered Behavior in the School Setting Unfortunately, we have approached the problem of identifying child be- havior disorders in the school setting as though it were a disease process capable of being isolated and reliably diagnosed. In fact, many of our as- sessment strategies attempt to apply this exact model to the analysis of problematic child behavior. In the author's opinion, our traditional ef- lofts in this area represent much, of what is wrong with current assess- ment and remediation services. For example, we act as though we have access to definitional criteria, classification systems, and measurement procedures that will allow us to 1) separate disturbed children from populations of nondisturbed chil- dren, 2) distinguish such children reliably from other categories of disa- bility (e.g., learning disabled, mentally retarded), and 3) reliably diagnose different child behavior disorders. It appears that nothing could be fur- ther from the truth. For instance, using current definitions, criteria, and methods, prevalence estimates of emotional disturbance in school age populations range anywhere from 0.05% to 40% (Below, 1979). Further, in a longitudinal study of 1,586 elementary school pupils in over 200 school districts in Minnesota, Rubin and Below (1978) found that in an- nual ratings of the sample children in grades K-6, 23-31% were judged by their teachers to be behavior problems in any one year. For children re- ceiving three or more annual ratings, the figure was 59%. Among those receiving six annual ratings, 66% of the boys and 51% of the girls were considered a behavior problem by at least one teacher. Similar findings have been reported by Wherry and Quay (1971), who found that 49.7% of the boys in presumably normal K-2 classes were rated as having behavior problems. What are we to make of these prevalence estimates? Are we really to be-

25 34 Walken

lieve that half of our elementary-school-ageTopulation is behavior disor- dered in some sense? This would be analogous to arguing that half of the adult population is neurotic and in need of intensive mental health ser- vices. Few professionals would accept the validity of such assertions. Surveys of the type referred to frequently use checklists of problematic child behavior, have teachers rate all children in their classes on them, and then compute the percentage of children who receive positive ratings on at least one item. It appears normal for children to receive positive ratings on some of the more innocuous items in these lists (e.g., restless, distracted, ilaydreaming). Most children do these things at one time or another. To make a more refined judgment about their impact upon child adjustment or achievement, we need to know their frequency, or rate, or the proportion of time each child engages in them. For example, if a child daydreams 80-90% of the time, there are obvious implications for his or her development or achievement. In contrast, if a child does so 1-2% of the time. there probably are no such iniplications. In making judgments of this nature, we need to know the kinds of behavioral items checked as well as the number checked. A child who receives 25 out of 50 items (problematic) checked on a checklist is likely to be very different from one who receives two, three, or four items checked. Similarly, two chil- dren can receive the same number of items checked but also be very. dif- ferent (e.g., descriptors of severe versus relatively innocuous behavioral problems with equally different implications for development). In the author's opinion, we need to stop trying to isolate child behavior disorders as unique forms of psychopathology which must be diagnosed in the traditional sense. Existing classification systehis do not even gener- ate acceptable, levels of diagnostic reliability across clinically trained pro- fessionals (Achenbach & Edelbrock, 1978). It is unlikely that we will ever be able to colinpletely separate child behavior disorders in the school set- ting from other categories of disability. In the author's view, we would be better off to develop school-based con- ceptualizations, classification systems, and measurement procedures of those factors that interfere with, disrupt, or are incompatible with educa- tional achievement and social development. We have available to us ex- cellent criterion measures for both academic and social lunctioning (e.g., achievement tests for academic performance and sociometric measures for social competence). The predictive validity of sociometric measures has proven to be quite strong (Gottman, 1977; Van Hasselt, Hersen, Whitehill, & Bellack, 1979). We also know which classes of academically related child behavior (e.g., attending, compliance, volunteering) facili- tate academic achievement (Cobb, 1972). We have an excellent knowl- edge base relating to disruptive or maladaptive behaviors that actively compete with academic performance. Similarly, Gottman and his col- leagues (Gottman, Como, & Rasmussen, 1975) have empirically identi- fied social skills that discriminate between popular and unpopular chil- dren. They found differences on referential communication skills, knowledge of how to make friends, and frequency of distributing and re-

26 Assessment of Behavior Disorders

ceiving positive peer interactions. These measures and empirically based knowledge give us the means to develop cost-effective screening and identification methods and also make it possible to identify dimensions of child academic and social functioning which directly affect child achievement and social competence. We have the technology to increase children's achievement and soaial conipetence levels through direct in- struction and intervention in the school setting. As long as we cling to our archaic and often irrelevant systems for defining, classifying, and identi- fying behavior disorders in the school setting, however, man, children who desperately need these services will not get them. We should establish a policy of systematically screening Jl children in these two broad areas (academic and social functioning) regularly and making services available to those children who need them, regardless of current status or category of disability. Children will, and should, be identified in this process, whose general pattern of classroom behavior is either disruptive of, or incompatible with, academic achievement and Fo- cial development.

Procedural Issues

Procedural, as used in this context, refers to assessment practices applied to behavior disordered children and used to make decisions about them. This section begins with a discussion of the variables that directly affect assessment practice. These are: 1) the model of psychological assessment one uses to guide assessment practice, 2) the persons conducting the as- sessment(s), and 3) the setting(s) in which assessments occur. In the re- mainder of the section, issues and best practice standards are presented for a series of assessment tasks that are involved in serving the needs of behavior disordered children.

Models of Psychological Assessment Coulter and Morrow (1977) argue that psychological assessment has two fundamentally distinct purposes. These are identification and interven- tion. Each requires different tests ahd interpretations of results. They note, as have other investigators (Hobbs, 1975; Kauffman, 1977), that di- agnostic labels resulting from the identification process have almost zero implications for the treatment process. They view assessment for inter- vention purposes as the primary concern of psychologists. It appears, however, that in traditional assessment practice in this area, we have in- vested far more energy, time, and effort in the identification and problem definition process than in assessment for intervention. There are a variety of assessment models available to guide one's assessment practice. Coul- ter and Morrow (1977) describe three models (medical, social system, and task analysis) for use in assessment for identification and intervention purposes. 3 6 27 Walker

The author recommends consideration of a behavioral mode! or approach to the full range of assessment tasks relating to the delivery of services to behavior disorder0 children in the school setting. This approach incor- porates many of the assumptions, principles, and recommended prac- tices of the social system and task analysis models described by Coulter and Morrow (1977): Many of the recommendations presented by the au- thor in the first section are based upon behavioral assessment principles:

The nature of a behavioral assessment model, its assumptions, and prac- tices are described in detail by Nelson and Hayes (1979), They describe it as " ... the identification of meaningful response units and their control- ling variables (both current environmental and organismic) for the pur- poses of understanding and altering human behavior" (p. 491). In this model, behavior is viewed as a sample of responding in a particular as- sessment situation. Unless empirical justification exists, inferences are not made beyond the present behavior and situation to underlying causes, other responses, or different situations. Behavioral assessment in- cludes the measurement of overt motor, physiological-emotional, and cognitive-verbal behaviors, This model encourages recording of multiple measures so as to ensure a broad-band assessment. Characteristically, overt motor behavior js measured via direct observations by trained ob- servers; physiological-emotional and cognitive-verbalbehavior is mea- sured by rating scales, checklists, questionnaires, and academic tests.

As noted, behavioral assessment measures both organismic variables and environmental factors within the setting or situation where functioning is considered disordered. Organismic variables include individual differ- ences produced by past learning and physiology. Such variables areoften nonalterable..1n some cases, however, they are (e.g., correctable sensory impairments). At the very least, assessment of these variables is consid- ered important for an adequate understanding of the disordered behavior.

Assessment of current environmental variables refers to the measurement and analysis of disordered behavior within natural settings and the vari- ables that influence or control it. Situationl specificity of behavior is a basic tenet of behavioral assessment. Situations differ in terms of expecta- tions, stimulus conditions, and contingencies, with corresponding differ- ences produced in child behavior, Therefore, it is important to assess child behavior in multiple settings to determine its status and potential for change. Social agents' perceptions of the child's behavior, including generalized behavioral expectations, are an important component of these assessment practices.

In the remainder of this chapter, specific assessment practices that incor- porate many of the principles and practices of the behavioral model are reviewed and discussed. In the author's opinion, this model has potential to solve a substantial number of the measurement problems that have tra- ditionally plagued attempts to deliver services to behavior disordeNd children in the school setting. 3

28 Assessment of Behavior Disorders

The Persons Conducting Assessments +.) In the author's opinion, all behavioral assessments of behavior disor- dered children in the school setting should be coordinated by the school . If assessments of a specialized nature are required, for ex- ample, neurological, neuropsychological, or medical, referrals can be made as deemed appropriate. Whenever possible, behavioral observa- tions should be conducted in those settings where child behavior is con- sidered disordered and by individuals under the school psychologist's supervision (teachers, counselors, aides, studefnt observers). The classroom teacher's input should be weighed carefully in decisions relating to serving behavior disordered children in the school setting. Traditionally, teacher judgment has not been regarded as either valid or reliable. Wickman's (1928) monograph comparing the attitudes of teach- ers and clinicians toward the classroom behavior problems of children raised some serious questions about the validity of teacher judgments. In this study, the judgments of psychologists weee accepted as a validation criterion against which teacher judgments were compared. The general lack of agreement between the two groups was interpreted as 'a measure of the teacher's inaccuracy in identifying problematic child behavior. The Wickman study did not test the accuracy of teacher judgment of child behavioronly whether it corresponded with clinicians' judgments. Ac- tual studies of teacher judgment show it to be very accurate (Bolstad, 1974; Greenwood et al., 1979b; Nelson, 1971; Schaefer, in press; Walker, 1970). In particular, teacher judgment is most adairate at the extremes of the distribution, where child behavioral attributes are most salient. Greenwood et al. (1979b) assessed the accuracy of teacher rankings of child verbal frequency for identifyin2gsoocially withdrawn children. Of the 26 teachers in the study sample, had identified the lowest inter- acting child within their first rank. Given three ranks, 65% could identify their lowest interacting child. By live ranks, 77% had identified the low- est interactor. Presumably, teachers would be even more accurate in iden- tifying acting out or disruptive child behavior because of its increased salience. In addition to their accuracy in judging child behavior, classroom teach- ers are in an ideal position to identify behavior disordered children. Teachers probably spend more time observing the behavioral characteris- tics of childeen in their classes than anyone except parents. It has been estimated that teachers spend 7,000 hours with their pupils in the ele- mentary grades alone. Given this amount cf time, teachers should have considerable information to use in making judgments about.the behavior of children in their classes. Teacher nominations, rankings, and ratings can be extremely useful souNes of information in the identification and assessment of behavior disorders. Teacher expectations also contribute a great deal of informa- tion about the ecology of the classroom and should be systematically measured in the process of defining and evaluating child behavior. 36 29 Walker

The Settings in Whioh Assessmprits Should Occur A cardinal rule of behavioral assessment is the need to demonstrate that conclusions reached in the assessment situation can be generalized to the criterion "real-life" situation; that is, where child behavior is considered disordered. Too often, assessments of school behavior disorders fail this simple test of relevance and validity. If a child is exhibiting highly aggres- sive behavior on the playground, his or her behavior should be assessed in that setting-Lnot in the clinician's office. As a rule, the child's behav- ior, and social agents' perceptions of it, should be assessed in all settings where it is considered disordered and in control settings. Assessment of child behavior in the home settinf; as a response to behav- ior disorders in school is, in srime respects, a questionable procedure. Whenever possible, however, it is recommendec in order to determine if it is disordered in both settings and to assess parant perceptions of it. As a rule, one will have to rely upon anecdotal reports and ratings from par- ents In some cases, parents may be willing to collect data on certain as- pects of child behavior or on family interactions. Parent-collected data, however, should be interpreted cautiously in these situations, as it would be highly vulnerable to demand characteristics and response biases (Johnson &Boldstad, 1973). In vivo assessments of this type are often time consuming and sometimes difficult to obtain. The relevance and quality of the information produced by such assessments, however, will contribute significantly to the deliv- ery of appropriate services to behavior disordered children. Assessment Tasks School professionals are chargewith completing a sequence of assess- ment tasks if behavior disorderehildren's needs are to be served effec- tively in the school ,5etting. These are: 1) screening, 2) defining the prob- lem,3)determining eligibility,4)selectingtargetbehaviorsfor intervention, 5) establishing baseline performances, 6) monitoring inter- ventions, 7) evaluating catcomes, and 8) conducting follow-up assess- ments. Issues are discussed and best practice standards are presented in relation to each of these tasks in the remainder of the paper. Screening studies show that teachers usually refer from 2-6% of the school age population for special services (Hyde, 1975; Nicholson, 1967: Robbins, Mercer, & Meyers, 1967). Most c: these referrals are for children with academic, not behavioral, problems (Kirschenbaum et al., 1977). Those behavior disordered children who are referred tend to exhibit mal- adaptive behavior patterns that are directed toward the external environ- .-ment (acting out, disruptive, hyper- 've, aggressive) and disturb class- room atmosphere. Children with of .ypes of behavior disorders are not as likely to be referred. It is apparent that large numbers of children with behavior disorders are

30 3 Z./ A

Assessment of Behavior Disorders

not being referred to needed services.sAll_children in regular classrooms should be screened regularly so that they have an equal chance to be identified for a variety of behavior problems diet can interfere with their social and academic development. The teacher referral process, as it tra- ditionally operP*--s, does not accomplish this goal. Systematic screening procedures art d which require the teacher to evaluate regularly all children in relati ,... to criteria that affect their brhavioral status and de- velopment. Kirschenbaum et al. (1977) have demonstrated the feasibility of a mass screening procedur that requires 20 to 40 minutes per classroom. A brief teacher ratingform,the AML (Cowen, Dorr,Clarfield,Kreling, McWilliams, Pokracki, Pratt, Terre!, & Wilson, 1973), was used as the pri- mary screening instrument in this study. Previous research on the AML had established its ability to discriminate between groups of maladjusted and normal children. The study found that teachers directly referred 6.9% of the primary grade level children in three inner city schools (n698). Mass screening using the AML subsequently identified an addi- tional 9.7% of the population as in need of services. Both groups exhib- ited significantly more maladaptive behavior than did a normative com- parison group on the CARS (Child Activity Rating Scale) (Lorian, Cowen, & Caldwell, 1974), indicating that teachers did not naturally refer all chil- dren in need of behavioral services. Economical, effective screening procedures of this type have significant applicability to the field of behavior disorders. They utilize teacher knowledge of child behavior, yet structure the teacher's judgment so that all children have an equal chance to be identified for behavior disorders. Other excellent systems of this type are available (Clarfield, 1974; Greenwood et al., 1979a). The author has found teacher rankings of child behavior to be extremely accnrate and predictive of status on criterion measures at the extremes of the distribution. Teacher rankings of child academic achievement are also very accurate (Greenwood, Hops, Walker, Guild, Stokes, & Young, 1979). Rathei than relying upon teacher nomination for referral purposes, teachers could he regularly asked to rank children in their classrooms on such variables as social competence, appropriate classroom behavior, and achievement. Children at the extremes of the distribution could then be studied arid evaluated more thoroughly using such methods as 1) anecdotal records, 2) checklists, 3) rating scales, and 4) observational data. The teacher would thus not have to complete rating instruments on all children in the classroom.

Problem Definition Once a child has been screened and identified as in need of behavioral services, it is important to define carefully the specific content of the be- havior disorder and to measure the teacher's behavioral expectations and/ 4o ,31. Walker

or tolerance levels in relation to adaptive and maladaptive child behavior in general (Walker, 1980). There are a variety of checklists and rating in- struments available for describing the content of child behavior disorders, in school and home settings. Some popular instruments for this purpose are: 1) the Devereux Child Behavior Rating Scales (Spivack & Levine, 1964), 2) the Behavior Problem Checklist (Qnay 1977), and 3) the Walker Problem Behavior Identification Checklist (Walker, 1970). Traditionally, such instruments have been heavily weighted toward problematic child behavior. Some recently developed instruments by Achenbach (1979), Gersten (1976), and Walker (1980) contain extensive descriptions of adaptive child behavior as well. Achenliach (1978) has discussed the im- porta'nce of obtaining ratings and descriptive information on both adap- tive and maladaptive forms of child behavior. The i,uthor proposes a three-dimensional model for describing the con- tent of child behavior after systematic screening effarts are concluded. In this model, classroom behavior is rated along a frequency dimension and a critical events dimension. The frequency index (ratings, counts, co- dings) is applied to both adaptive and maladaptive forms of classroom behavior. Adaptive behavior facilitates academic performance/achieve- :ment and maladaptive behavior disrupts it. The purpose of this index would be to identify maladaptive behaviors the child engages in too fre- quently and adaptive behaviors that are engaged in too infrequently, for example, excesses and deficits. A sample list of such pinpoints is included in Table 2. Table 2 Frequency Index of Adaptive,and MaladEptive Classroom BehAriors Follows classroom rules Talks out of turn Complies with teacher demands Gets out of seat Takes turn Whines 'LListens to teacheHnstructions Disturbs others Makes assistance needs known Disrupts the class Produces work of acceptable quality Defies the teacher Attends to assigned tasks Does not complete assignments Volunteers

It would also be important to obtain teacher assessment(s) of critical be- havioral events that are relatively independent of frequency, yet have so- rious implications for child status. A single occurrence of any of the events listed in Table 3 Would be a cause for serious concern by service providers. The referred child's social coinpetence should be rated by the teacher in specific social skills areas and, whenever possible, assessed with socio- metric procedures. The author recommends the following social skills areas: 1) affective skills, 2) interactive skills, 3) approaching others, 4) conversation skills, 5) cooperation, 6) coping skills, and 7) making friends. The child should be compared to peers in each area, that is, the child is less skilled, as skilled, or more skilled than normal peers. 41 32 Assessment of Behavior Disorders

Table3 Critical Event Index =Child masturbates in public Child assaults an adult Child attempts to seriously physically injure another Child engages in seltzmutilation, e.g., head banging, biting, or cutting oneself Child's verbal behavior i$ irrational and/or incomprehensible Child is not in contact with reality Child sexually molests another child Child threatens suicide Child shows evidence of physical abuse Child shows evidence of drug use

In fact, normative comparisons of this type are recommended whenever possible on both indirect (teacher ratings) and direct (behavioral observa- tions) measures of child behavior. These sorts of comparisons are helpful in ensuring that the referral is bacsed on actual disordered child behavior and not as a result of other factors. As a general rule, a peer of the same sex should be selected for comparative purposes (Walker & Hops,1976). If clear differences exist in the two sets of ratings, then the referral is, in all likelihood, more appropriate than if no or only minimal differences exist.

It is also highly recommended that direct observational data be recorded on the child's behavior in those settings where it is considered to be a problem and in at least one setting where it is not (if one exists). Norma- tive peer comparisons should be conducted, if possible, in each setting. This comparison should provide valuable information on levels of appro- priate behavior in such settings. There are a number of observational codes and procedures available for use in classroom and playground set- tings which are easy to use and not too time consuming (Alessi,1980; Keller,1980;Walker,1979).The information yield from such assess-4 ments is extremely high and the data usually have substantial relevance to the task of problem definition. As noted, teacher expectations should be measured and the child's perceived behavior problems evaluated in relation to the teacher's standards (instruments for this purpose were de- scribed earlier). Finally, it is also recommended that parent ratings be ob- tained to compare perceptions of child behavior across home and school settings.

Determining Eligibility If a child is referred for problematic behavior in the classroom, the child and/or the teacher are in need of some type of service(s) and assistance. As noted earlier, the factors that prompted the referral are unaffected by whether the child meets lo'cal, state, and/or federal eligibility criteria. We need to replace our,current system of certifying a referred child as ED or BD before any services or assistance become available which correspond to the type and severity of the referral problem. This would, of course, be

33 4 2 Walker

deterMined only after a careful analysis of the child's behavior within the referral setting(s) and the social agents' perceptions of the child's behav- ior problem(s). Eligibility decisions should focus instead on which ser- vices or assistance the child's behavior problems require. These could range from simple consultant assistance in the classroom to an intensive behavior management program administered in a special setting. In some cases referral to an outside agency may be warranted. Fox (Note 2) has conceptualized a least restrictive program of treatment in which available therapeutic services are arranged in a hierarchy of in- tensiveness and restrictiveness. Whenever possible, one should begin with the least restrictive and least intensive level of treatment that is ap- propriate and then move to more restrictive levels as warranted. In devel- oping the CORBEH behavior management packages referred to earlier (e.g., CLASS, PASS, PEERS, AND RECESS), the authors used a combina- tion of indirect and direct measures to establish eligibility criteria. These were teacher ratings on specific behavioral pinpoints and behavioral ob- servations xecorded on the child's performance in referral setting(s). The purpose of this dual criterion was to obtain a direct measure of the child's behavior as well as the teacher's of it and to ensure that thecz, shild to whom the program was applied actually warranted the invest- ment of time and energy required in the implementation process. Chil- dren who did not qualify were usually exposed only to components of the program or to some other less intensive intervention procedure.Children for whom the program was not successful were recommended for more intensive treatment services. Setting up specific criteria on both indirect and direct measures of prob- lem behavior to determine eligibility and then correlating them with dif- ferent levels and types of treatment services or assistance could be gener- ally applied to serving behavior disordered children's needs in the school setting. It is hoped that it itiould result in a larger number of children being placed in contact withwpropriate services.

Selecting Target Behaviors for Intervention A great deal of research remains to be done in empirically identifying be- havioralcorrelatesofsuccessfulclassroom adjustment, academic achievement, and social combetence. Some important conceptual (Foster & Ritchey, 1979) and empirical (Gottman et al., 1975) work has been di- rected toward identifying social skills that determine social competence. Similarly, Cobb (1972) empirically identified academic survival skills that were predictive of achievement. Almost no work has been done in identifying those behaviors that distinguish between successful and non- successful classroom adjustment. Careful descriptive studies in these areas will make future interventions far more precise and cost effective. It is apparent that the same interven- tion procedure applied to empirically determined target behaviors versus

34 zAssessment o Behavior Disorders

nonempirically determined behaviors will have vastly different effectson overall adjustment. To date, we have developed a very powerful interven- tion technology that is applicable to the field of behavior disorders. When our technology of target behavior selection approaches that for interven- tion, we will be in a position to deliver cost-effective services in the school setting. Until this technology is completely developed, selecting target behaviors will have to rely to some extent upon the advice of experts, logical analy- sis, and arbitrary judgment. Social validation techniques have been par- ticularly effective in structuring our judgments in this area (Kazd in, 1977; Van Houten, 1979; Walker & Hops, 1976). Social validation refers to the use of experts, consumers, or significant social agents in rating the impor- tance of behaviors judged to be important as targets of intervention, and whether target responses selected for intervention have changed suffi- cieritly for the treatment to be considered successful. Usually,a Likert- type scale is used for this purpose. As part of some research on the mainstreaming process, Walker (1980) has assessed receiving teachers' expectations about classroom behavior. Fifty regular and 22 special education teachers responded to an inventory in which they rated the importance of adaptive skills and competencies, as well as the degree to which they are or are not accepting of maladap- tive child behavior. The results indicated that teachers view classroom control and compliance behaviors as most important. Peer-to-peer social skills were viewed as least important. The least accepted child behaviors included stealing, self-abuse, teacher defiance, inappropriate sexual be- havior, and tantrums. Interestingly, this list would be characterized as high intensity, low base rate pinpoints. Again, the most acceptable mal- adaptive behaviors were deficient peer-to-peer social skills. This infor- mation tells us what teachers view as important, but it also identifies areas of child performance having powerful implications for develOp- ment (social skills, for example) which are not viewed as important by teachers. When designing interventions for behavior disordered children, it is very important to respond to the specific problems that prompted the referral. It is equally important, however, to assess the child's status on behavioral responses that teachers in general see as predictive of good adjustment and also on those that teachers may not view as important, but that are empirically related to achievement, success, or competence.

Establishing Baseline Performance Baseline status on target behaviors should be assesSed, whenever possi- ble, using direct observational procedures in natural settings so that treat- ment effects can be evaluated in both intervention and nonintervention settings. Nontarget but related behaviors should also be assessed to deter- mine whether the intervention has only specific or more generalized ef- fects (Kazdin, 1973).

35 4 Walker

Indirect assessments of child behavior on these pinpoints using ratings or checklists contributed by teachers and/or parents also provide a basis for assessing the perceived impact of an intervention. The combination of direct and indirect assessment can provide for a precise analysis of an intervention's effects. Normative peer comparisons on baseline measures are also to be recommended in this assessment process.

MonitOring Interventions Fidelity of implementation has been recognized as a 'very important fac- tor in the success of any.intervention. As a rule, we have assumed that interventions are implemented by social agents (parents and teachers) in the manner that we intend. Unfortunately, such is often not the case. It is now generally recognized that the implementation process should be measured and dodnmented whenever possible to increase the likelihood of high quality treatment. This would involve keeping -careful records on such variables as praise ite, number of time outs, points awarded, points subtracted, privileges selected, frequency of reprimands, and alterations in stimulus conditions. These are essentially process measures that docu- ment the extent to which implementation goals are reatized. They make it possible to identify sources of treatment failure and to design more effec- tive interventions.

Evaluating Outcomes Child outcomes should be evaluated according to 1) absolute gain from pre- to postassessment time points, 2) relative gain in terms of movement toward a normative standard, mist 3) assessments of the social signifi- cance of the achieved gains. Baseline measures should be administered at pre-, during, and posttime points to assess treatment outcomes ade- quately. The during measure provides an assessment of the maximum im- pact of the intervention on child behavior. The postmeasure is an assess- ment of short-term maintenance effects. Data recorded on nonreferred peers will make it possible to determine whether intervention has moved the treated child into the normal range. Social validation measures (from teachers and parents) provide information on how the consumer's view changes. Treatments that move performance into the normal range are generally considered successful (Walker & flops, 1976).

Conducting Follow-up Assessmknts Until the beginning of the 1970s, it was largely assumed that treatment effects automatically generalized to nontreatment settings and were maintained indefinitely over time after intervention was terminated. Sys- tematic assessments in natural settings showed that the opposite was true (Johnson et al., 1976; Stokes & Baer, 1977; Walker & Buckley, 1972;

4 5 36 Assessment of Behavior Disorders

Walker et al., 1975). Unprogrammed generalization and maintenance of treatment gains is an extremely rare occurrence (see Walker, 1979, for a review of this topic). When it does occur, investigators are usually not able to identify the specific features, elements, or attributes of the inter- vention accounting for the generalization and/or maintenance effects. Baer, Wolf, and Risley (1968) suggest that generalization should be pro- grammed rather than expected or lamented when it does not occur. In conducting follow-up assessments of treatments administered to be: havior disordered children in the school setting, it is strongly recom- mended that such measures be taken in all settings where treatment ef- fects are expected to occur. Furthermore, long-term assessments should be made to determine the durability of achieved treatment effects. In those cases where such effects are not achieved, low-cost variations of the original interventio'n can be implemented to bring child behavior back to criterion levels.

'Conclusion

In the author's view, there needs to be a radical reconceptualization of behavior disorders in the school setting. The assumptions we make about child behaviorshave a dramatic cmpact upon assessment practices and the way in which we interpret assessment information. Conclusions based on such information determine the kinds of remediation services eventually made available to behavior disordered children. New definitions of disor- dered child behavior in the school setting could then be developed from this reconceptualization and be operationalized and translated into mea- surement strategies and practices that would result in the delivery of rele- vant, individualized treatment services to identified children. The author is aware of the complex philosophical, economic, legal, and logistical barriers that wouid impinge upon these tasks. In many respects, the practices suggested in this chapter represent idealized versions of as- sessment practice which, if a-thieved, will likely 1Te years in coming. Pro- fessional time is always the uitical element in considerations relating to change in existing practices. It is apparent, however, that behavior disor- dered children are not being adequately assessed or served under our cur- rent system. How pressures for change in these areas are incorporated into existing practices, with only limited staff resources available, will be an interesting process to observe in the next few years.

46 37 Walker

Reference List

Achenbach, T. Developmental psychopathology. New York: Ronald Press, 1974.

Achenbach, T. Psychopathology of childhood: Research problems and issues. Journal of Con- sulting and , 1978, 46(4), 759-776.

Achenbach, T. The child behavior profile: An empirically based system for assessing chil- dren's behavioral problems and competencies. International Journal of Mental Health, 1979. 7(3-4), 26-40.

Achenbach, T., & Edelbrock, C. The classification of child psychopathology: A review and analysis of empirical efforts. Psycholdgical Bulletin, 1978, 85(6), 1275-1301.

Alessi, G. Behavioral observation for the school psychologist: Responsive-discrepancy model. School Psychological Review, 1980, 9(1), 31-44.

Allpart, G. Traits revisited. American Psychologist, 1966, 21, 1-9.

Mlport, G. Personalistic psychology: A trait approach to .personality. In W.S. Sahakian (Ed.), Psychology of personality: Readings in theory. Chicago: Rand McNally & Company, 1974.

American Psychiatric Association. Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders (3rd ed.). Washington, D.C.: Author, 1980.

Beer, D., Wolf, M., & Risley. T. SoMe current dimensions of applied behavior analysis. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1968, L 91-97.

Below, B. Definitional and prevalence problems in behavior disorders of children. School Psy- chology Digest, 1979, 8, 348-353.

13ecker, W.C.. & Krug, R. A circumplex model for social behavior in children. Child Develop- ment, 1964, 35, 371.396.

Bolstad. 0. The relationship between teachers' assessment of students and students' actual behavior in the classroom. Unpublished Doctoral dissertation. University of Oregon, 1974.

13raphv. J., & Goad. T. Teachers' communication of differential expectations forchildren's classroom performance: Some behavioral data. Journal of , 1970, 61, 365-374.

Brophy, J., & Good, T. Teacher-student relationships: Causes and consequences. New York: 'Jolt, Rinehart and Winston. Inc., 1974.

13runer. J. Toward a theory of instruction. New York: W.W. Norton & Co.. Inc., 1968.

Clarfield, S. The development of a teacher referral form for identifying early school maladap-

tion. American Journal of ', 1974, 2, 199-210. .

Clarizlo, H., & McCoy, G. Behavior disorders in children (2nd ed.). New York: Thomas Y. Crowell Company, Publishers, 1976.

11, Cobb. J. The relationship of discrete classroom behavior to fourth grade academic achieve- ment. Journal of Educational Psychology, 1972. 63, 74-80.

Coulter. A., & Morrow. H. The concept of emotional disturbance within special education. Austin: Austin Regional Resource Center, University of Texas, 1977.

Cowen, E., Darr. D.. Clarfield, S., Kreling. B., McWilliams, S., Pokracki, F., Pratt, D., Terre!, D., & Wilson. A. The AML: A quick screening device for early detection of school maladaption. American Journal of Community Psychology. 1973, L 12-35. 4 7

38 Assessment of Behavior Disorders

Edelbrock, C.,Empirical classification of children's behavior disorders: Progress based on par- ent and teacher ratings. Digest, 1979. 8(4), 355-369.

Foster. S.. & Ritchey. W. Issues in the assessment of social competence in children. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1979, 12, 625-638. Freemont. T., & Wallbrown, F, Types of behavior problems that may be encountered in the classroom. Journal of Education, 1979, Spring, 5-23. aersten, E. Health Resources Inventory: The development of a measure of the personal and social competency of primary grade children. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychol- ogy, 1976, 44. 775-786.

Gottman, J. Toward a definition of social isolation in children. Child Development, 1977, 48. 513-517.

Gottman, I., Gonso. J., & Rasmussen, B. Social interaction, social competence and friendship in children. Child Development, 1975, 46, 709-718.

Greenwood, C., Hops, II., Walker, H.M., Guild, J., Stokes, J., & Young, R. Standardized class- room management program: Social validation and replication stUdies in Utah and Oregon. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1979, 12(2), 235-254.

Greenwood, C., Walker, 11.M., Todd. N., & Hops, H. SAMPLE. Social assessment manual for preschool level. Eugene: Center at Oregon for Research in the Behavioral Education of the HandicappedAiniversity of Oregon, 1979. (a) Greenwood, C., Walker, H.M., Todd, N., & Hops, H. Selecting a cost-effective device for the assessment of social withdrawal. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1979(b), 12, 639- 652. Hobbs, N. The futures of children. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass Inc., Publishers. 1975. Hyde, E. School psychological referral in an inner city school. Psychology in the Schools, 1975, 12, 412-420. Hyman, I., Bilus, F., Dennehy, N., Feldman, G., Flanagan, D., Lovoratano, J., Maital, S., & McDowell, E. Discipline in American education: An overview and analysis. Journal of Edu- cation, 1979, Spring, 51-68, Johnson, S., Boldstad. 0., & Lobitz, G. Generalization and contrast phenomena in behavior modification with children. In E.J. :.issh. L.A. Hamerlynck, & L.C. Handy (Eds.). Behavior modification and families. New York: Brunner/Mazel Inc., 1976.

Johnson, S.M.. & Boldstad, 0. Methodological issues in naturalistic observation: SoAne prob- lems and solutions for field research. In L.A. Hamerlynck, L.C. Handy, & E.J. With (Eds.). Behavior change: Methodology, concepts, and practice. Champaign, IL: Research Press, 1973. Kauffman, J. Characteristics of children's behavior disorders. Columbus, OH: Charles E. Mer, HII, 1977.

Kazdin, A. Methodological and assessment considerations in evaluating pro- grams in applied settings. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1973, 6. 517-531. Kazdin, A. Assessing the clinical or applied importance of behavior change through social validation. Behavior Modification, 1977, 1, 427-452. Keller, H. Issues in the use of observational assessment. School Psychological Review, 1980, 9(1), 21-29.

Kirschenbaum, D., Marsh, M., & Devage, J. The effectiveness of a mass screening procedure in an early intervention program. Psychology in the Schools,,1977, 14(4), 400-406. Walker

Kulik, J., Stein, K., & Sarbin, T. Dimensions and patterns of adolescent antisocial behavior. Journal of Consulting Psychology, 1968, 32, 375-383. Levitt, E. Research in psychotherapy with children. In A.E. Bergin & S.L. Garfield (Eds.), Handbook of psychotherapy ond behavior change: An empirical analysis. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1971. Lorian, R., Cowen, E., & Caldwell, R. Problem types of children referred to a school based mental health program. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 1974, 42, 491-496.

Mischel, W. Personality and assessment. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1968. Mischel. W. Continoity and change in personality. American Psychologist. 1969. 24, 1012- 1018.

Neel. R.. & Rutherford, R. Exclusion of the socially maladjusted from services under P.L. 94- 142. Why? What should be done about it? In iWood (Ed.), Perspectives for a new decade: Educators' responsibilities for seriously disiurbed and behaviorally disordered children und youth. Reston, VA: Council for Exceptional Children Publications, 1981.

'kszlelson, M. Techniques for screening conduct disturbed children. Exceptional Children, 1971 37. 501-507. Nelson, R.. & Hayes, S. The nature of behavioral assessment: A commentary. Journal of Ap- plied Behavior Analysis. j 979, 12, 491-50.

Nicholson, C. A survey of referral problems in 59 Ohio school districts. Journal of School Psy- chology. 1967, 5, 280-286. Patterson, G. An empirical approach to the classification of disturbed children. Journal of Clinical Psychology, 1964, 20, 326-337. Peterson, D. Stope and generality of verbally defined personality factors. Psychological Re- view. 1965, 72,48-59. Phillips, B. Problem behavior in the 6tementary school. Child Development. 1968, 39, 895- 903. Quay, H. Dimensions of personality in delinquent boys as inferred from the factor analysis of case history data. Child Development, 1964,35, 479-484.

Quay, H. Measuring dimensions of deviant behavior: The behavior problem checklist. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology,1977, 5. 277-288.

Quay. II. Patterns of aggression. withdrawal, and immaturity. In II. Quay & J. Wherry (Eds.). Psychopathological disdrders of childhood. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1972.

Reichfer, R.. & Schopler, E. Developmental therapy: A program model for providing individual services in the community. In E. Schopler & R. Reichler (Eds.), Psychopathology and child development. New York: Plenum Publishing Corporation, 1976.

Robbins, R.. Mercer, J. & Meyers. C. The school as a selecting-labelling system. Journal -of School Psychology, 1967, 5, 270-279. Ross, A., Lacey. H., & Parton, D. The development of a behavior checklist for boys, Child De- velopment, 1965. 36. 1013-1027. Ross. A. Behavior diwrders of children. New York; General Learning Cceporation, 1971.

Ross. A. Psychobgical Disorders of Children: A behavioral approach to theory. research and therapy. 2nd edition. New York, McGraw-Hill, Inc., 1980. 4 5 40 Assessment of Behavior Disorders

Rubin, R. & Balow, B. Prevalence of teacher identified behavior problems: A longitudinal study. Exceptional Children, 1978, 45, 102-113.

Schaefer, E. Development of adaptive behavior: Conceptual models and family correlates. In M. Begab, H. Garber, & H.C. Haywood (Eds.), Prevention of retarded development in psycho- socially disadvantaged children. Baltimore: University Park Pess, (in press).

Shepherd, M., Oppenheim, B., & Mitchell, S. Childhood behavior and mental health. New York: Grune & Stratton, 1971.

Spivack, G., & Levine, M. The Devereux child behavior rating scales: A study of symptom behaviors in latency age atypical children. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 1964, 68, 700-717. Spivack, G., & Swift, M. The Devereux elementary school behavior rating scales: A study of the nature and organization of achievement related disturbed classroom behavior. Journal of Special Education, 1966, I. 71-90.

Stokes, T., & Baer, D. An implicit technology of generalization. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1977, 10(2), 349-358.

Ullmann, L., & Krasner, L. Case studies in behavior modification. New York: Flolt, Rinehart & Winston, 1965.

Ullmann, L& Krasner, L. A psychological approach to abnormal behavior. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1969.

Van Hasselt, V., Hersen, M., Whitehill, M., & Bellack, A. Social skills assessment and training for children: An evaluative review. Behavior Research and Therapy, 1979, 17, 413-437.

Van Houten, R. Social validation: The evolution of standards of competency for target behav- iors. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1979, 12, 581-592.

Wahler, R. Setting generality: Some specific and general effects of child behavior therapy. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1969, 2, 239-246.

Walker, H.M. The acting out child: Coping with classroom disruption. Boston: Allyn and Ba- con, Inc., 1979.

Walker, FLM. Thr Walker problem behavior identification checklist (WPBIC). Test and manual. Los Angeles: Western PsyclvAogical Services, 1970, Revised 1976.

Walker, H.M. The SBS (social behwior survival) inventory of teacher expectations and social behavior survival. Initial validation results. Eugene: UniversitY of Oregon, 1980,

Walker, H.M. Administrative, logistical, and fiscal considerations in the implementation of CORBEH's behavior management packages for the remediation of specific classroombehav- ior disorders. Proceedings of the COMIC/Mideast Regional Resource.Center Conference?on Programming for the Emotionally Handicapped, May, 1977, 18-30.

Walker, FIN., & Hops, H. Use of normative peer data as a standard for evaluating classroom treatment effects. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1976, 9,159-168.

Walker, H.M., & Hops, Fl. The CLASS program for acting out children: R & D procedures, pro- gram outcomes and implementation issues. School Psychology Digest, 1979, 8, 370-381.

Walker, FI.M., & Buckley, N. Programming generalization and maintenance of treatment effects across time and across settings. journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 1972, 5, 209-224.

Walker, H.M., Hops, H., & Johnson, S.M. Generalization and maintenance of classroom treat- ment effects. Behavior Therapy, 1975, 6, 188-200.

41 50 Walker

Welker, KM., Hops, H., & Greenwood, C.R. Competency-based training issues in the develop- ment of behavior management packages for specific classroom behavior disorders. Elehayior Disorders,1976, 1 ,112-122. Wherry, J., & Quay, H. The prevalence of behavior symptoms ii, 7aunger elementary school children. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 1971,41,136-143. Wickman, E. Children's behavior and'teachers' aUitudes. New York: The Commonwealth Fund,"I928. Wood, F., 84 Lakin, K. Disturbing, disordered, or disturbed? Perspectives on the definition of problem behavior in educational settings. Minneapolis: Advanced Training Institute, Uni- versity of Minnesota, 1979.

Reference Notes

1. Towksberry, J. Distinguishing between disturbed behavior and behavior that is disturb- ing. Paper presented at the Third Annual Conference on Emotional Disturbance, Uni- versity of Texas, Austin, February, 1981.

2. Fox, R. Least restrictive models of treotment, Paper presented at Third Annual Confer- ence on Emotional Disturbance, University of Texas, Austin, February., 1981.

42 Assessment of Severe Behavior Disorders1

Bob Algozzine

The terms behavior disorders (BD) and emotional disturbance (ED) have come to be used interchangeably; in fact, both are used to refer to students "who arouse negative feelings and induce negative behaviors in others" (Kauffman, 1981, p. 4). The passage of Public Law 94-142 (The Education for All Handicapped Ckildren Act of 1975) provided an opportunity for the federal government to propose definitions for categories considered appropriate as federal concerns. The federal definition (for purposes of implementation of PL 94-142) of "seriously emotionally disturbed" fol- lows: (i) The term means a condition exhibiting one or more of the following char- acteristics over a long period of time and to a marked degree, which ad- versely affects educational performance: (A) An inability to learn which cannot be explained by intellectual, sensory, or health factors; (B) An inability to build or maintain satisfactory relationships with peers and teachers;

(C)Inappropriate types of behavior or feelings under normal circumstances;

I Material in this chapter is based on chapters authored by Bob Algozzine which appear in B. Algozzine, R. Schmid, and C. D. Mercer (Eds.), Childhood behavior disorders: Applied research and educational practice. Rockville, MD: Aspen Sys- tems Corporation, 1981.

43 Algozzine

(D) A general pervasive mood of unhappiness or depression; or

(E)A tendency to develop physical -ymptOns or fears associated with per- sonal or school problems. (ii)The term includes children who are schizophrenic or autistic. The term does not include children who are socially maladjusted, unless it is deter- mined that they are seriously emotionally disturbed (Federal Register, 1977, 42(163), p. 42,478).

Algozzine, Schmid, and Connors (1978) described two major types of dis- turbed children. The TYPE I (Regular ED) child was characterized as the milder form of behavior problem typically found in regular public school settings; the TYPE II (Clinical ED) child was considered more "severe": He/she is the child whose behavior may be pToblematic in school as well as at home; may be exhibited in favorable and unfavorable school environments; may not be more immediately responsive to environmental managemeot strategies; and/or, may be related to organic inadequacies within the child. (p. 49)

They offered the following definition for use in conceptualizing emo- tional disturbance: The emotionally disturbed child is the student who, after receiving supportive educational assistance and counseling services available to all students, still ex- hibits persistent and consistent severe to very severe behavioral disabilities which interfere with productive learning processes. This is the student whose inability to achieve adequate academic progress and/or satisfactory inter- personal relationships cannot be attributed primarily to physical, sensory or in- tellectual deficits. (p. 49)

They also argued that the differences between mildly and severely emo- tionally disturbed students were a function of the operational criteria used with the definition. For example, the mildly ED student may exhibit interfering behaviors once or twice a day, while the severely ED student might exhibit them once or twice an hour; differences in the actual types of behaviors exhibited also were thought to differentiate the conditions. When Olson, Algozzine, and Schmid (1980) asked teachers to rate a list of characteristics relative to applicability to various types of emotional dis- turbance, they found mildly and severely ED students were differentiated by the service delivery options and the nature and magnitude of the be- haviors exhibited.

Grosenick (1981) writes that Severe behavior disorder refers to the most severely handicapped of the chil- dren and youth so identified by state and local education Agencies for the pur- pose of federal funding. Included within such a populati n ge studentsoften labeled as delinquent, schizophrenic, autistic, troublemakers, truants, aggres- sive, acting-out, socially maladjusted, and withdrawn, (e.r,., all types of the sev- erest behavior problems that are servad or should be ser ed by public and pri- vate agencies). These are the children and youth who are primarily in self- contained, segreget asses or facilities. (p. 184) 53 44 Assessment of Severe Behavior Disorders

And while professionals may argue whether autisticor socially mal- adjusted students should be included or excluded from the category, the term severe behavior disorders (SBD) refers to those students with the most atypical, deviant behavior patterns that differentiate them from other school students.

Historical Perspective

Society has always separated individuals on the basis of their behavioral differences. The earliest classification system was offered by Hippo- crates; he grouped deviance into one of three main categories: mania, phrenitis, or melancholia, and did not differentiate childhood disorders from adult conditions. It was not until Rie mid-nineteenth century that professionals recognized specific childhood disorders. Prior to that time "abuse, neglect, cruel medical treatment (e.g., bleeding), and excessive punishment were common and often accepted matter-of-factly for chil- dreg as well as adults who showed undesirable behaviors" (Kauffman, 1981, p. 33). Similarly, during that era, deviance (undesirable behaviors) was viewed as caused by Satanic possession or other supernatural influ- ences; in fact, it was not until the discovery of the cause of general paresis and its eventual cure that the belief in natural causes became more promi- nent (Ullman & Krasner, 1969). Simultaneously, childhood behavior dis- orders were "discovered." According to Kanner (1971), in the early 1900s, Kraepelin grouped a set of characteristics together under the general label of Dementia praecos; in so doing, he set into motion the current classification system in psychia- try. Kanner (1971) also reports that at about the same time, De Sanctis referred to a similar set of characteristics as Dementia praecoccissima when they appeared in children, and Heller coined the term Dementia infantalis for another child-specific disorder. In 1943, Kanner described the behavioral symptoms of 11 children, and early infantile autism was born. Although the first Diagnostic and Statistical Manual (DSM-I) did not contain a separate classification for childhood disorders, DSM-I1, published in 1968, contained a major category labeled "Behavior Disor- ders of Childhood and Adolescence." Severe behavior disorders such as hyperkinetic reaction, withdrawing reaction, overanxious reaction, unso- cialized aggressive reaction, and general delinquent reaction were de- scribed in DSM-II. In less than a century, disorders of childhood and ado- lescence had emerged from practical nonexistence to accepted diagnostic classifications. As is often the case when science proceeds rapidly, considerable confu- sion characterizes this recent history of severe behavior disorders. For ex- ample, the term childhood psychosis was used as a general reference to severe behavior disorders; many forms of it were discovered. Mahler (1953) described symbiotic infantile psychosis, Rank (1949) discussed the atypical child, and Bergman and Escalona (1949) described children

45 54 a Algozzine

with unusual sensory sensitivity (Kauffman, 1981). Rutter (1968) argued that the failure of professionals to differentiate adequately among condi- tions ofsevere disturbance resulted in a poorly concbptualized, impracti- cal body of knowledge relative to treatment of autism. Algozzine and Schmid (1981) put it this way: Considerable professional energy and time was expended in activity intended to truly identify the pature and characteristics of this severe disorder. Unfortu- nately, the results left a great deal to be desired, especially in regard to treatment (RitvO, 1976). One problem was that differen. thejapists named and viewed the condition from different perspectives4those whp saw aufism (or whatever they termed it) as a childhood form of schizophreAia used a different theoretical framework and nomenclature than those who yiewed the condition as a sepa- rate, distinct entity. For two decades differential diagnosis of this condition was in the "eye of the beholder," and little useful substantive theory or research on its characteristics evolved. (p. 58) -- By the 1970s, severe behavior disorders ofchildren and.adolescents had arrived. Numerous specific conditions were described in the professional literature, and treatment programs in public and private schools were op- erating (Kauffman, 1981). The common denominator among the various conditions was behavior that was considered significantly different from the accepted norm. The basis for the deviance has been addressed from a number of different perspectives: In discussing the origins of behavior disorders, Kauffman (1981) empha- sized family factors, biological factors, and school factors as important. Conceptual models of child variance and their impliCations have been anglyzed by Rhodes and his colleagues (Rhodes & Head, 1974; Rhodes & Paul, 1978; Rhodes & Tracy, 1972a, 1972b). Discussions of 1:liological, be- havioral, psychodynami0 and ecological perspectives of emotional dis- turbance are presented in Algozzine, Schmid, and Mercer (1981). Infact, the point of view one lias relative to the etiology of severe behavior disor- ders shapes theTerspective one maintains with regard to assessment of severe behavior disorders.

Theoretical Perspectives of Etiology

A variety of theoretical perspectives on the existence of severe behavior disorders have been posited; proponents of each "theory" emphasize dif- .ferent conceptual points in explaining behavioral dPviance. Biophysical and psychodynamic models are based more on the idea that "nature" rather than "nurture" is important to,health and normalcy. Behavioral and sociological points of view indicate nurturance. Ecological theory is the interactionist perspective.

Biophysical Model V Aithougn Kurt Vonnegut (1973) is not recognized for his contributions to 55 46 Assessment of Severe Behavior Disorders

theories of severe behavior disorders, he offers an interesting description of one aspect of the biophysical model. He Arites, that people, mostly men, suffering from the last stages of syphillis, from locomo- tor ataxia, were common spectacles in downtown Indianapolis and in circus crowds when I was a boy. Those people were infested with carnivorous little corkscrews which could be seen only with a microscope. The victims' vertebrae were welded together after the corkscrews got through with the meat between. The syphilitics seemed tre- mendously dignifiederect, eyes straight ahead. (p. 3) The discovery of the existence of syphilitic spirochetes in the brain of paretic patients and subsequent identification of a biologically based treatment represents one of the underlying notions of biophysical theory; that is, deviant behavior is viewed as caused by abnormally functioning systems, which, if corrected, result in improved behavioral symptoms Algozzine (1981a) has discussed genetic predispositions, biochemical in- consistencies, and nutritional inadequacies which are thought to cause behavioral disorders. Genetic evidence is offered by the observation that one percent of the general population is afflicted with schizophrenia, 4 to 10 % of individuals whose parents are schizophrenic are also likely to be diagnosed, and 67-86% of monozygotic twins of schizophrenics are simi- larly affected. Similarly, the finding that some autistic children possess elevated levels of serotonin has led to a considerable amount of biochem- ical research.

Psychodynamic Model Psychodynamic theorists stress the existence of stages of psychological., development, which, if violated, may result in deviant behavior. As Moustakas (1953) argued, "impairment of emotional growth during some stage of development with resultant distrust toward self and others and hostility generated from anxiety" (p. 19) may be the cause of psychologi- cal disturbance. Proponents of this perspective believe that instinctive drivesenergize psychological life; they also believe there are specific components to one's personality and specific developmental stages for healthy psychological individuality. Various mechanisms and interac- tions are the psychodynamic bases with which individuals combat the: day-to-day stresses and conflicts which threaten "normal" development.

Behavioral Model Proponents of the behavioral perspective of severe behavior disorders argue that all behavior is learned in a systematic manner and therefore it is unlearned or changed by following the same set of principles which applied to the initial learning. The behaviorist manages the environment to alter the responses of individuals; the target in intervention is an in- crease or decrease in the frequency of behavior(s) of the individual thought to be disturbed or disabled. As Kauffman (1981) points out, "two

47 5 6 Algozzine

major assumptions underlie the behavioral model: The essence of the problem is the behavior itself, and the behavior is a function of environ- mental events" (p. 28).

Sociological Model A variety of sociological explanations for the nature and development of deviant behaviors have been proposed (cf. Martindale, 1981). Proponerits of the cultural transmission explanation believe that deviance is learned by association with deviant individuals; they would probably argue against "segregated" special classes and for "mainstreaming," for the positive modeling influences. Labeling theorists believe that it is the ap- plication of socially sanctioned labels that makes acts "deviant"; rule breaking becomes deviance through conditions that exist outside the rule breaker. Social disorganization theorists posit that differences among community members are sources of differences in the prevalence of "deviance"; organized communities with abundant support services pro- duce less deviance than disorganized, "deprived" communities. Socio- logical theorists focus on external circumstances as the source of severe behavior disorders.

Ecological Model Sarason and Doris (1979) point out that interpersonal transactions and relationships are two-way streets. Characteristics and behaviors of each of us are effected by (and have effects on) the characteristics and behaviors of others. As Algozzine (1981b) indicates, Ecological theorists believe that deviance is as much a function of where and with whom a child interacts as it is the nature of behaviors that are exhibited by the child (cf. Rhodes, 1967, 1970). To these theorists emotional disturbance is in the "eye of the beholder" and is generated or developed when an individual's behavior is viewed as disturbing or bothersome by others with whom interac- tion occurs. Deviance, then is as much a function of reactions to behavior as it is the behavior in and of itself. (p. 168) Each theory for the etiology-of severe behavior disorders adds new infor- mthion; proponents of each have made valuable contributions to our un- derstanding and treatment of behavior problems. A comparison of the major theoretical positions is presented in Table 1.

Assessment of Severe Behavior Disorders

There are no tests to determine if an individual is severely behaviorally disordered. Performance on tests and actual observations of behavior merely provide information from which inferential judgments are made. These judgments take the form of diagnostic decisions that are thought to r. 48 cr cr CD

cth' Table 1 CD Comparative Analysis of Major Theoretical Perspectives 0 C/) Theoretical Perspective Key Proponents Origin of Disturbance Focus of Treatment CD Biophysical Rim land Internal imbalances Alteration of presumed Ritvo Genetic malfunctioning causal factors through CD Bender Nutritional inadequacies- biophysical therapies CD Behavioral Ferster Learning principles Alteration of presumed Skinner Reinforcement causal factors through Hewett PunishMent behavior therapies C:1 Environmental stimuli rn* Environmental consequences

Psychodynamic Freud Psychic development , CD Alteration of presumed -1 Adler Psychological development causal factors through Ericson Internal conflict Redl Sociological Durkheim Social conditions Alteration of presumed Goffman Social sanctions causal factors through ' Scheff Social disorganization social change Ecological Rhodes Social transactions Alteration of presumed Sameroff & Zax Persona) characteristics causal factors through Sarason & Doris Ecosystem imbalances ecosystem change Note: From Childhood behavior disorders: Applied research and educational practice by B. Algozzine, R, Schmid, & C. D. Mercer, p. 186, copyright 1981 by Aspen Systems Corporation. Reprinted by permission. Algozzine

be the best representations of the assessment data. To aid clinicians in this process, a number of catalogs of characteristic symptoms are avail- able; theDiagnostic and Statistical Manual-III (DSM- III) of the American Psychiatric Association ( tl 980) is perhaps the best example. The intent of DSM-III and other similar material is to provide operational criteria on which to justify diagnostic decisions. Diagnostic decision making in psychology arid education follows a rather straightforward paradigm. ft goes something like this: Deviant individuals (A) exhibit certain characteristics (B). Target individual (C) exhibits some characteristics (B). Target individual (C) is deviant (A). It can be shown, however, that such reasoning is illogical. Consider the following: Cows (Ai eat grass (B). you (C).eat grass (B). k'ou (C) are not necessarily a covv (A).

Because psychoeducational decision-making practices are based on illog- ical reasoning, problems and issues have arisen.

Issues in Assessment of Behavior Disorders The diagnosis, classification, ond evaluation of behavior disorders are necessarily subjective acts; in each case, the characteristics of target indi- viduals are analyzed and a decision about the pathologic: l nature of those characteristics is rendered. One could argue that sev, e behavior disorders, emotional disturbance, psychosis, or any other mental disor- ders are anything we want thern to be. And, in an attempt to reduce the potency of this argument, professionals have come up With definitions for the disorders they believe eXist. As Kauffman (1981) puts it, "the defi- nitiort one accepts will reflect how one conceptualizes the problem of disordered behavjor and, therefore, will determine what intervention strategies one considers appropriate" (p. 19, italics added). Because defi- nitions are subjective and not universally accepted or followed, however, dilemmas and disappointments permeate the field of severe behavior dis- orders. Definitions. In 1969 Bower proposed a definition for "emotionally handicapped children"; he suggested that about 10% of the school popu- lation fit this category and argued that they exhibited one or more of the following characteristics oVer a period of time and to a marked extent:

1. Aninability tolearn which cannot be explained by intellectual, sensory, or health factors...

5 d 50 Assessment of Severe Behavior Disorders

2. An inability to build or nrilintain satisfactory interpersonal relationships with peers and teachers... 3. Inappropriate typesofbehavior Orfeelings under normal circum- stances. .

4. A general, pervasive mood of unhappiness or depression ... 5. A tendency to develop physical symf5toms, pains, or fears associated with personal or school problems.V. 22-23) The similarities between this definitithtepmotionally handicapped chil- dren, often: considered mildly handic ed (cf. Reinert,1976,Shea, 1978,and others), and the definition suppOrting the federal initiative to serve "severe" children should be obvious.the assessment problems in this definition should be equally obvious: 1. What is an inability to learn? How is it measured? Haw do we determine it is not due to intellectual, sensory, or health factors? Howis it corrected?

2. What are satisfactory interpersonal relationships? How are they measured? 3. What behaviors are inappropriate under normal circumstances? What scale is used to determine their inappropriateness? What are normal. cir- cumstances? 4. What is a pervasive mood of unhappiness? How is it measured? How is it corrected? Regardless of which definition one subscribes to relative to the definition of behavior disorders, the simple fact remains that the severe (or any other) behavior disorders are subjectively derived by professionals who believe it is important to serve children with problem behaviors. Unfortu- nately, this humanitarian ideal has resulted in some dilemmas and disap pointments for those same professionals. Dilemmas. How many children are handicapped by severe behavior dis- orders? This question has important significance for assessment because it is the numbers of children which are often the basis for the dollars for children. The provisions of PL 94-142 provide that the federal govern- ment will supply 40% of the excess costs of educating a handicapped child. At a practical level, more children identified as handicapped means more federal dollars for support. "The actual numbers (i.e.; pre- valence) of children with behavior disorders have varied from about .5% of thb school population to20%or more" (Kauffman,1981, p. 22).This variance is not surprising. Considering the state-of-the-art in definition, we may find as many children with severe behavior disorders as is eco- nomically profitable (cf. Kauffman,1980).

Disappointments. The validity of the logical paradigm on which diag- nostic decisions are made rrsts on the extent to which universal and spe- cific characteristics are used for class inclusion. If all (universal) cows eat grass and if only (specific) they do it, then, if you eat grass, you are a cow. The characteristics used for class inclusion in the category of behavior

51 6 U Algozzine

disorders are anything but universal and specific. Therefore, the reliabil- ity of diagnostic decision making based on these characteristics has been low. Schwartz and Johnson (1981) report data compiled by Rim land (1971) relative to "agreement between pairs of diagnosticians on the diag- nosis assigned to 445 children showing severe behavior disorders" (p. 118); the agreement among the diagnosticians ranged from 0-38%. The extent to which two or more clinicians, using a given system, can arrive at a similar diagnosis after independently assessing the same individual has been a problem in the area of severe behavior disorders. Studies using the DSM-I and DSM-H categories for adult disorders have been completed. Beck, Ward, Mendelson, Mock, and Erbaugh (1962) found that psychia- trists, acting independently, agreed on the diagnosis of schizophrenia in 54% of the cases; agreement on subcategories within broad groups was even lower. Analyses of the work of others has indicated similar results; that is, reliable judgments can be made only if broad (e.g., psychotic, neu- rotic, etc.) diagnostic groupings of adult disorders are evaluated (Sandi- fer, Pettus, & Quade, 1964; Schmidt & Fonda, 1956; Schwartz & Johnson, 1981; Ullman & Krasner, 1969). Cantwell and his colleagues (Cantwell, Mattison, Russell, & Will, 19791 Mattison, Cantwell, Russell, & Will, 1979) conducted a series of studies evaluating diagnostic decisions made about children using the DSM-II and DSM-III categories; their results supp.)rt the statement of Schwartz and Johnson (1981): "Judges tend to disagree more often about specific diagnoses, and interjudge reliability for specific diagnoses has often been found to be unacceptably low (p. 58)." They later add: Difficulties in differentiating between autism and various other conditions ex- hibiting autistic-like symptoms were shown to stem from the tendency of many diagnosticians to use undefined, vague terms when describing psychotic symp- toms or to use the terms "autism" and "schizophrenia" very broadly.... The lack of agreement among professionals is an important problem for clinicians and researchers. (p. 117) Severe behavior disorders as an area of professional concern is an amal- gam of theory, philosophy, and subjective decision making. Current as- sessment practices reflect as well as contribute to a less than optimal state-of-the-art. Disregarding the problems that characterize the assess- ment practices in severe behavior disorders, the diagnosing of children goes on; the hope, of course, is that the benefits of treatment will outweigh any disadvantages of identification. Within this context, assess- niont practices follow several different perspectives.

Assessment Perspectives

Assessment results serve many purposes; they are the basis for sdreening, identification, intervention, and evaluation. All assessment information is the result of an interview, an observation, or a clinical judgment. The nature of the information will vary as a function of the assessment per-

52 JL Assessment of Severe Behavior Disorders

spective of the clinician. And while there may be no "pure" theoretical assessment battery, a discussion of typical information that is collected and analyzed relative to various theoretical points of view is presented.

Biophysical Assessment As Algozzine (1981) indicates, "the presence and extent of abnormal body functions is determined by medically oriented examinations; such assessments include collection of historical information as well as analy- sis of various types of physical and biological functioning" (p. 93). This information includes a history in which areas of personal and inter- personal functioning are assessed, as well as various neurological and laboratory tests. Information about the family development and present condition is collected in a complete medical history. A neurological ex- amination includes assessment of consciousness and mental state; cra- nial nerve, motor, reflex, cerebellar, and sensory system functioning; and consultative assessments (e.g., electroencephalogram, brain scan, compu- terized transaxial tomography, etc.) as deemed necessary by a neurolo- gist.

Typical laboratory tests evaluate the body fluins (i.e., blood and urine). In some instances, a Serum Multi Automated Computer (SMAC) analysis is performed; it includes 18-25 blood tests, Analysis of body chemical levels tells physicians and clinical pharmacists a great deal about various body functions. For example, an elevated level of blood glucos3 is sugges- tive of a disorder in glucose metabolism.

Psychodynamic Assessment Psychological development and personality components as conceptual- ized by psychodynamic theorists can not be directly observed; psychody- namic assessment relies on clinical interpretation of test performance and information collected in interviews. The assessment process is used to obtain information about the individual's development and personal- ity characteristics to be compared to that of normal individuals; after all, normal people (A), however we define normalcy, exhibit certain charac- teristics (B), and, cows eat grass.

A frequently used personality test is the Rorschach Ink Blots; it consists of five achromatic and five chromatic inkblots about which free associa- tion, inquiry, and limit testing responses are elicited. The nature of the responses is evaluated and compared to performance of "clinical" popu- lations for interpretar,on. For example, Levi and Kraemer (1952) reported that a greater than average number of human movement (M) responses in children was associated with provoking, attention-getting behaviors, and severe temper tantrums. 4 trained clinician would interpret similar re- sponses (i.e., M responses) as indicative of similar deviant behaviors.

53 62 Algozzine

Similar analyses of intellectual performance (IQ) on the Wechsler scales serve as another basis for assessment of psychologicaldevelopment and functioning. For example, findings of Verbal IQ scores significantly above Performance IQ scores have been reported for most mental disorders. Per- formance IQ scores significantly higher than Verbal IQ scores are thought to be representative of acting out disorders (cf. Ogdon, 1969).Unusually low information scores are thought to be indicative of repressive de- fenses; unusually low Digit Span scores suggest possible manic-depres- sive conditions (cf. Ogdon, 1969). The basis for clinical interpretation of interview data and test perfor- mance is the undistributed middle term argument discussed earlier. Re- search and observations reveal that hyperactive or anxious individuals (A) score low on the Digit Span subtest (B). Assessment results indicate that an examinee (C) scores low on the Digit Span subtest (B); it is con- cluded that the examinee (C) is a hyperactive or anxious individual (A).

Behavioral Assessment iThe behavioral approach to assessinent is based on the conceptual frame- work in which behaviorists view deviance; that is, behaviorists address the extent of individual behavioral deficits or excesses as well as the quality of environmental cnntrol (e.g., , punishments, etc.). For example, if a chi, 1 is referred for hyperactive behavior, the be- havioral psychologist would first develop a clear definition of the target behavior and then determine the extent of the behavior and an, environ- mental variables that influence the behavior. Typically, one behavior at a time is addressed, usually the most maladaptive is addressed firs'. Vari- ous properties of the behavior may be observed; that is,frequency, dura- tion, inter-response time, and latency are observable (Criswell, 1981). Additionally, information about the behavior may be collected in intei- views (Mash & Terdal, 1981). When an adequate analysis of the problem has been completed, plans for intervention are initiated; follow-up as- sessments are used to evaluate progress. Descriptive analyses character- ize behavioral assessments; that is, the nature of the behavior is mapped aid interventions are implemented and evaluated.

Sociological Assessment Characteristics of the family constellation, home environments, siblings and peers, and ',.'significant others" are evaluated in assessments based on the sociological model. This may be accomplished by conducting struc- tured interviews or sociometric procedures. For example, by asking teachers and classmates about a particular child, some measure of social status may be obtained. Similarly, by Observing classroom interactions, social relationships in school can be evaluated. Parental attitudes toward school and other social functions are also important in a sociological as- sessment; they may be evaluated through interviews or direct observe-

64) 54 Assessment of Severe Behavior Disorders

tions during a home visit. Family interactions provide information for analyses of social functioning. The exact information collected in any as- sessment will vary as a function of the orientation of the evaluator. And, Cr. whiie a behavioral sociologist might collect different information than a psychodynamic one, data obtained in a sociological assessment will be used to explain deviance in terms of environmental influences.

Ecological Assessment From the ecological perspective, the extent to which ecosystem charac- teristics and child characteristics match is the basis for defining devi- ance. In an ecological assessment, factors that contribute to the presence or absence of deviance are identified and used to plan interventions. The collection of appropriate ecological assessment information is accom- plished in several ways. Ecosystem members may be-asked to report or analyze their tolerances and expectations for selected characteristics (Al- gozzine, 1981). The extent of "match" between salient characteristics (in the individual) and tolerances or expectations is evaluated; ecological disturbance is more probable when high frequency behaviors are less tolerated by significant ecosystem members. Intervention can then be planned to address any component of the ecological disturbance; that is, level of behavior may be altered or levels of tolerance may be altered or some combination of the two may be planned. There is no clear-cut, simple procedure for determining if a child's behav- ior is disordered; in fact, the decision is subjectively derived. Determin- ing if behavior is severely disordered simply adds one more level of sub- jectivity. This in no way implies that some of us do not have problems in school or with interpersonal relationships. It merely argues that those problems are not necessarily ours; in fact, they belong to all individuals who participate in defining them. The traditional approach to assessment is based on illogical reasoning. Simply because you exhibit characteristics that are observed in deviant individuals does not mean you are deviant. In fact, being identified as deviant in that sense has little or no prognostic, practical yalue. Its con- tinuing practice has led to some critical issues in the area of assessment (cf. Algozzine,1980:Ysseldyke & Algozzine,1982). An alternative approach can be formulated in which it is argued that cer- tain behaviors (A) are bothersome to others (B). If you (C) engage in those behaviors (A), we can conclude that you (C) will be bothersome to others (B). The logical validity of the argument depends on practical concerns; that is, the extent to which there are bothersome behaviors and the extent to which you do them are empirical issues. From a treatment or prognos- tic standpoint, this approach is encouraging because the nature of the problem is obvious (i.e., your behavior is the source of concern in others). There is no need to dwell on the significance; We merely identify the be- havior(s) of concern and then program for change.

55 6, Algozzine

Assessment Model

The following general steps may help in formulating a model to guide alternative assessment practices for severe behavior disorders. Naturally, they are an amalgam of the previously discussed assessment perspectives (e.g., biophysical, behavioral, etc ). Step 1. Observe the ecology. No behavior or problem occurs in a vac- uum. The expectations and tolerances of teachers, parents, peers,and others are important determinants of behavior; they may vary from family to family, school to school, teacher to teacher, or child to child. Whenever possible, this information should be collected prior to a formal referral; information collected in an unobtrusive manner may differ from, that col- lected after a referral is faade and additional expectations are generated. Information on the internal constraints/external pressures present in a particular school or class may prove very useful in conceptualizing and dealing with the problem. Step 2. Select and define target behaviors. Behavior disorders (severe pr otherwise) exist because of behaviors. Often it is not easy to identify the specific behavior that presents the pro`,!em; in many instances, many be- haviors are of concern. The fact remai. -, however, that it is behavior that causes parents, teachers and others Lo address the idea ofbehavior disor- ders. Target behaviors that have high ecological significance should be identified; these same behaviors can become the focus of subsequent in- terventions. Step 3. Observe the behavior(s) of the target individual. If an adequate definition of the behavior has been developed, it will be observable. Ob- servations should be collected by different individuals in different set- tings at different times. Similarly, corroborative evidence (i.e., results of interviews, behavioral ratings, etc.) should be collected from several sources to identify the extent of the behavior in the targetindividual. Step 4. Observe the behavior in a target random peer. Some information on the extent to which the problem behavior(s) occursin other individu- als should also be collected. The collection of these data should follow the same procedures that were used for the target individual. This step may be repeated several times to ensure an adequate sample of thebehav- ior of others. Step 5. Address the extent of the problem. If similar data have been collected, comparisons of a current rather than historical nature can be completed. Such comparisons can be Useful in identifying the exact na- ture of the problem. For example, the context and extent of the child's problemscan be evaluated in reference to standards set by the classroom peer(s). Similarly, information about how different a child actually is can be useful in working with teachers. Often, without such an analysis, the target child appears to be more of a problem than he or she actually is. 65 56 Assessment of Severe Behavior Disorders

Step 6. Search for a cause. Once the characteristics of the behavior and related factors have been identified, possible causes should be evalu- ated. For example, restlessness or inattentiveness may be caused by die- tary inadequacies, bioLhemical imbalances, inappropriate contingencies, family traits, teacher intolerances, or many other factors. By exhausting and possibly identifying probable causes, appropriate treatment perspec- tives may be facilitated. Clearly, the best assessment is one that addresses all possible causes for the problem. Step 7. Formulate treatment strategies. At best, the information col- lected during any assessment is the basis for formulating tentative hy- potheses about the nature and extent of a problem. For this reason, the real value of engaging in assessinent rests in the extent to which produc- tive treatment strategies can be identified and implemented. In develop- ing intervention plans, the assessment results should be used to guide decision making relative to alternatives available (i.e., ecological op- tions). The plan(s) should also include a time frame for evaluation. Step 8. Intervene. The proposed intervention should be conducted for a specified period of time. During the intervention, assessment data simi- lar to that collected previously should also be collected. The dath provide the basis for evaluating the effectiveness of the intervention. Step 9. Evaluate the intervention. Because tentative hypotheses are the basis for treatment plans, the evaluation of any intervention should be a mandatory step in the assessment process. Without it, we are engaging in poorly conceptualized and conducted research with human subjects. Because we are often engaging in an activity that is based on subjectively derived problemsome owe it to our clients to evaluate the results of our efforts. The results of such a procedure become the basis for reengaging the proposed model at an earlier step or for deciding that we have suc- cessfully "cured" the problem.

Assessment Perspective

As with any model, that proposed is only limited by thg value it accrues from use. Because it is being presented for use here, its current value is unknown. The value of the traditional model has been established. The practice of observing characteristics of target individuals (directly or through ratings and inference) and comparing them to lists of "psychopa- thology" has resulted in a state-of-the-art that is impressive only because it is provocative. Practitioners, of course, have the option of continuing to add to the dilemmas and disappointments which characterize current as- sessment practices or engaging in a different model of assessment.

57 Algozzine

Reference List

Algozzine. B. Current assessment practices: A new use for Ow Susan 13. Anthony dollar? In C. L. I lansim (Ed.). Child assec.ment: The process and the product. Seattle: Program Develop- ment Assistance System, Unive.,ity of Washington. 1980.

Algozzine. B. Biophysical yterspoctive of emotional disturbance. In B. Algozzinm R. Schmid, & C. D. Mercer (Eds.). Childhood belawior disorders: A"pp lied research and mlucational prac- tice. Rockville, MD: Aspen Systems Corporation, 1981. (a)

Algozzine. B. Ecological perspective of emotional disturbance. In B. Algazzine, R. Schmid. & c. D. Mercer (Eds.), Childhood behavior disdrders: Applied research and educational prac- tice. Rockville, MD: Aspen Systems Corporation. 1981. (b)

Algozzine. B. & Schmid. R. Identification and characteristics. In B. Algozzine, R. Schmid. & C. D. Mercer (Eds.), Childhood behavior disorders: Applied research and educational practice. Rockville. MD: A.spen Systems Corporation, 1981.

Algozzine. II.. Schmid, H.. & Connors, B. Toward an acceptable definition of emotional distur- bance. Behavioral Disorders. 1978, 4, 43-52.

Algozzine. B.. Schmid. H., & Mercer. C. D. Childhood behavior disorders: Applied research and practice. Rockville, MD: Aspen Systems Corporation. 1981.

American Psychiatric Asociation. Diagnostic and statistical manualIL Washington. D.C.: American Psychiatric Association. 1980,

Beck. A. T.. Ward. C. II.. Mendelson. M.. Mock. J. E., & Erbaugh. J. K. Reliability of psychiatric diagnoses IL A study of consistency of clinical judgements and ratings. American journal of Psychiatry. 1962. 119, 351-357.

IhTginan. & Escalona. S. Unusual sensitivities in very young children. Psychoanalytical Study ot the Child. 1949, 3-4. 333-352.

Bower, E. M. Early identification of emotionally handicapped children in school (2nd e(l.). .Springlield. IL: Charles C. Thomas, Publisher. 1969.

Cantwell, P.. Mattison, R., Russell, A. T. . & Will, 1,. A comparison of DSM II and DSM III in tlw diagnosis of childhood psychiatric disorders: Difficulties in use, global comparisons and conclusions, Archives of General Psychiatry, 1979, 36, 1127-1128.

Criswell. E. The behavioral perspective of emotional disturbance. hi It. Algazzine, R. Schmid. ,aid C. D. Mercer (Eds.). Childhood behavior disorders: Applied research and educational practice Rockville. MD: Aspen Systems Corporation.1081.

Federal Register. 42 (16:31. Education of I landicapped Children: Implementation of Part B of the Education of the Handicapped Act, Rules and Regulations.'1.7.S. Government Printing Office. August 2:3. 1977.

Grosenick. JK. Public school and mental health services to severely behavior disordered stu- dents Behavior Disorders, 1981, (1. 183-190

Kanner.L. Autistic disturbances of affective contact. Nervous Child, 1943, 2, 217-250.

Kanner. L. Childhood psychosis: A historical overview. Journal of Autism and Childhood Schizophrenia. 1971. 1(1). 14-19.

Kauffman. J. M. Where special education for disturbed children is going: A personal view. Exceptional Children, 1980. 46. 522-527.

Kauffman. IM. Characteristics of children's behavior disorders (2nd ed.). Crhinibuii, 011: Charles E. Merrill Publishing Company, 1981.

58 Assessment of Severe Behavior Disorders-

Levi, J., & Kraemer, D. Significance of a preponderance cif human movement responses on.the Rorschach in children below age ten. Journal of Projective Techniques, 1952, 16, 361-365.

Mahler, M. S. On child psychosis and schizophrenia. Psychoanalytic Study of the Child, 1953, 7, 286-305.

Martindale, D. The nature ond types of sociological theory (2nd ed.). Boston: Houghton-Miff- lin Company, 1981.

Mash, E. J.. & Terdal. L. G. Behavioral assessment of childhood disturbance. In E. J. Mash and L. G. Terdal (Eds.). Behaviarol assessment of childhood disorders. New York: The Guilford Pans, 1931.

Mattison, R., Cantwell, D. P., Russell, A. T., & Will, L. A comparison of DSM-II and DSM-III in the diagnosis of childhood disorders. Archives of General Psychiatry.1979, 36, 1217-1222.

Moustakas, C. E. Children in play therapy. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1953,

Ogdon, D. P. Psychodiagnastics and personality assessment. A handbook. Los Angeles: West- ern Psychological Services, 1969.

Olson. J.. & Schrnid, R. Mild, moderate and severe ED: An empty distinction'? Behavioral Disorders, 1980, 5, 96-101.

Rank. B. .'alaptation of the psychoanalytical techniques for the treatment of young children with atypMal development. American Journal of orthopsychiatry. 1949, 19, 130-139.

Reinert, II. C. Children in conflict. St. Louis: The C. V. Mosby Company, 197,

Rhedes, W. C. The disturbing child: A problem of ecological management. Exceptional Chil- dren. 1967, 33, 449-155.

Rhodes, W. C. A community participation analysis of emotional disturban,P. Exceptional Chihlrem 1970. 37, 309-314.

Rhodes, W. C., & flead, S. (Eds.). A study of child variance (Vol, 3). Ann Arbor: University of Michigan. 1974.

Rhodes, W. C., & Paul, J. L. EmotMnully disturbed and deviant children. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, Inc., 1978.

-Rhodes, W. C., & Tracy. M. L. (Eds.). A study of child variance (Vol. 1). Ann Arbor: University of Michigan, 1972. (a)

Rhodes. W. C., & Tracy. M. L. (Eds.) A study of child variance (Vol. 2). Ann Arbor: University of MMhigan, 1972. (b)

Rimland, B. The differentiation pf childhood psychoses: An analysis of checklists for 2,218 psychotic chikiren. Journal of Autism ond Childhood Schizophrenia, 1971, 1, 161474.

Ritvo, E. R. (Ed.). Autism. New York: Spectrum Publications, 1976,

Rutter, M. Concepts of Autism: A review of research. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychi- atry, 1966 9, 1-25.

Sandifer, M. C., Pettus, C., & Quade, D. A study of psychiatric diagnosis. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, 1964, 139, 350-356.

Sarason, S. B., & Doris, J. Educational handicap, public policy, and social history. New York: The Free Press, 1979.

59 Algozzine

Shea. T. M. Teaching children and youth with behavior disorders. St. Louis: The C. V. Mosby Company.,1978. Schmidt, H. 0., & Fonda, C. P. The reliability of psychiatric diagnosis: A new look. journal of Abnormal and , 1936, 52, 262- 267. Schwartz. S.. & Johnson, J. H. Psychopathology of childhood: A clinical-experimental ap- proach. New York: Pergamon Press, 1981. Ullman, L. P., & Krasner, L. A psychological approach to abnormol behavior. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, lnc.,1969.

Vonnaglit, K.. fr. Breakfost of champions. New York: Dell Publishing Co. Inc., 1973.

Ysseldyke, J. E., & Algozzine. B. Perspectives on the assessment of learning disabled students. Learning Disability Quarterly,1979, 2. 3- 13. Ysseldyke. J. E., & Algozzine. B. Critical issues in speciorand remedial edii cation. Boston: I loughton-Miffl in Company, 1982.

k-4

60 A Model for the Differential Assessment and Placement of Emotionally Disturbed_ Students in Special Educatidn Programs Sheldon Braaten6

It is widely recognized that there are large numbers of children and youth whose behavior is disturbing to such a degree that they require the spe- cialized services of trained professionals. While this recognition is not new, widespread concern and the mandate for effective intervention pro- grams is quite recent. For years, adults and children alike who were iden- tified as "mentally ill" were segregated from the mainstreaM of society, often with little hope of returning to their natural environments. With the increasing knowledge in the area of emotional disturbance, a major shift in approaches emerged during the 1950s and 1960s. In 1964, Morse, Cut- ler, and Fink wrote, "we have come to recognize that the treatment of the patient in his normal life situation ... is a liowerfultool in our efforts" (p. 1). This view has been most dramatically demonstrated by the emergence of public school programs and services for dinotionally disturbed students. It was logical that schools become a major focus for intervention pro- grams becaus.e 'if their extensive contact with children, personnel re- sources, and pressures from teachers and parents to work with students having social or emotional problems. Increasingly, total treatment pro- grams have becOme viewed as a, responsibility of educators (Hammill & Bartel, 1975). Evans and Nelson (1977) noted that for many students, ",8chool experience alone was effective in the socialization and intellec- tual development of children witli problem behavior and that access to a comprehensive mental health program was of no additional benefit" (p. 605).

61 Braaten

Since 1977 the most compelling influence on school programs has been the mandate of PL 94-142, requiring that all handicapped children and youth be provided "appropriate" special education services in the "least restrictive environment." Key words in the mandate are "appropriate" and "least restrictive environment." The requirements of the law place on educators the responsibility to: 1) identify the problems and needs of children accurately; 2) determine the most effective' interventions; and 3) determine and implement a program designed to foster social, emotional, and academic grOwth. The extent to which educators meet this responsi- billty is dependent, in part, on their effort and ability to assess the prob- lems Of children accurately, and to develop interventions differentially. Apart from providing the critical programs and services, the tasks of as- sessment and determining appropriate interventions have proved to be complex .and often frustrating. Unlike the, instruments and processes of assessment for the ,hearing or visually impaired or the physibally handi- capped, the processes for determining appropriate services for the emo-' tionally disturbed are not precise and are complicated by variables other than the student's behavior.

Definition 4

The problems begin with deciding who is'clisturbed," or what consti- tutes emotional disturbance. There is little agreement on a definition ((;rosenick & Huntze, 1980; Hewett & Taylor, 1980; Wood & LAin, 1979.). Generally, the definitions used reflect the theoretical perceptions of the individual or organization performing the asse`ssment, and have histori- cally influenced the assessment process itself, as well as the implications for interventions (Bullock & Zayer, 1980; Newcomer, 1980; Rhodes & Tracy, 1972). Thus, the first assessment issue for educators is which theo- retical assumptions to use as a basis for criteria to identify ,emotionally disturbed children. Four of the most prevalent models are the psychoana- lytical model, the sociological model, the behavioral model, and the eco- logical model. Each of these models is discussed in detail in other chap- ters of this volume and the reader may review those discussions for descriptions of the implications of theories on assessment practices. Defidition is an important issue in assessment because,it shapes percep- tions and influences the process itself. Traditionally, definitions are the basis for classifying (Hewett & Taylor, 1980), comparing (Howell & Mc(;lothlin, 1978), and labeling (Wood & Lakin, 1979) problem behavior.,. These processes are based on the assumption that problem behavior can be defined and categorized in such a way that the diagriostician(s) can then assign a label and prescribe an intervention. Unfortunately, the existing definitions have not provided a reliable means for bridging the gap between classification and intervention. Be- havior that is viewed by one person as merely different may be viewed by 71 62 A Model for Differential Assessment and Placement

another as a disorder (Kauffman, 1979). Topographically similar behavior in one instance may be defined as an impairment, while in another as emotionally disturbed, and in still another, as maladaptive. In each in- stance, the definition chosen by the evaluators may imply a different kind of intervention. Further, no specific behavior in itself is abnormal. Be- cause of this issue Kauffman concluded, "... our experience as special educators has demonstrated the utter futility of trying to achieve diaegnos- tic purity (p. 59)." Another problem with definitions is the potential negative effects of the labels that accompany them. Onewiew is that there is something negative and even hostile in defining and labeling children as emotionally dis- turbed (Wood, 1981). The labeler isjn a powerful, decision-making posi- tion and the labeled individual becomes vulnerable to a self-fulfilling prophecy. Minority and lower socioeconomic grouPs are particularly at risk in school settings. According to Wood, '- The opinion of the teacher, and the administrator. ... supplemented perhaps by a statement from a social worker or school psychologist, is usually sufficient to establish the "need" for special programming for behavioral reasons of a low socioeconomic status student. By contrast, outside support in the form of a full clinical report may be necessary in the case of his or her higher socioeconomic status classmate. (p. 53)

Wood stresses that evaluators can minimize the intrusiveness of labels if they understand labeling and assessment as a process, introduce as much detailed and objective descriptions of behavior as possible into the rec- ord, and rely on group rather than individual decisions. We are reminded that, "In the end, labels are not assigned on the basis of ratings, observa- tions, or test scores, but by people interpreting and valuing such data" (Wopd & Lakin, 1979, p. 9). The process must be done with particular sensitivity and, according to Morse, "sh6uld generate trust, and insight with the child, parent and educators" (1979, p. 9). Despite their problems, definitions and labels do have a positive func- tionthey entitle the student to services.' From an administrative per- spective, definitions are included in rules and regulations to guide the delivery of services (Cullinan & Epstein, 1979). They determine how pro- grams are communicated to parents, students, and the corrimunity. They may dictate certain aspects of the program that are to be included. And, they may potentially affect the number of students to be served. If the assessment process relies on a definition that serves primarily as an administrative means to provide services, then the basic issue becomes establishing criteria for a good definition. Wood and Lakin (1979) pro- posed four elements of a good definition and two others that concern the ,use that we make of them. They are presented in the form of questions: (1)The "disturber" element: What or who is perceived to be the focus of the problem? tls (2)The "problem behavior" element: How is the problem behavior described?

63 Braaten

(3)The "setting" element: In wrhat setting does the problem behavior occur? (4)The "disturbed" element: Who regards the behavior as a problem? And the questions that relate to the use we can make of the definition:

(5)The "operationalizing" element: Through what operations and by whom is the definition used to differentiate disturbers from nondisturbers or to ac- cess the needs of disturbers?

(6)The "utility" element: Does the definition ... provide the basis for plan- ning activities that will benefit those labeled .... (pp. 7-8) Definitions must be perceived in relation to what the student needs in, order to achieve. They should serve as a guide for interventions that will be implemented. In this sense, definition may be viewed as the outcome of the assessment process, rather than a set of criteria from which to choose a label. The current educational definition used in the regulations implementing PL 94-142 refers to "Behavioral Disabilities" as those characteristics that adversely affect educational performance to a marked degree over a long period of time. As it is presented in the law, the definition falls short of meeting the criteria previously presented. It leaves it to the individuals using the definition to develop the elements that will make it operational. On the surface, this limitation may be vrewed as a major weakness, but it can also be a major asset. If viewed from the ecological perspective, it allows for variance in perceptions and recognizes disturbance as a rela- tive phenomenon. Its most important function for educators is the focus on characteristics that adversely effect learning.

The Assessment Process

Simply stated, assessment is a decision-making process. The primary ob- jective is to identify student _needs and determine interventions. The pur- pose is planning, rather Than assigning labels. Evaluators are concerned about the individual and his or her idiosyncratic nuances, according to Morse (1979), but "it is just as critical to evaluate the nature of the envi- ronment as the person" (p. 22). Assessment must be prescriptive. "It can be considered an exploratory strategy rather than a routine application of specific procedures" (Evans & Nelson, 1977, p. 610). There has been an overreliance on traditional and rou- tinely administered test batteries, which has not proved very useful for diagnosing behavior management problems (Kauffman, 1979). "Appro- priate evaluation techniques," according to Howell, "define yariables, delineate the objectives .. . and focus intervention" (1981, p. 34).This does not imply that psychometrics should be abandoned; rather it em- phasizes that,

64 A Model for Differential Assessment and Placement

... in assessment the presOriptive (describing behavioral deficits and assets as a starting point for a treatdient program) and evaluative (providing an objective measure of the child's progress) functions of assessment are much more signifi- .cant than the diagnostic (describing the child with reference to some compari- son population) or predictive (estimating the child's probable status at a later point in time). (Evans & Nelson, 1977, p. 608) Few would argue with the prescriptive function of assessment. The chal- lenge has been to develop models for directly linking assessment data to interventions. In education settings, where the mandate requires "appro- priate" programs in the "least restrictive environment," the question be- comes, by what criteria do evaluators decide that the student should be served within the regular classroom, resource room, special class, special school, or residential program? Deno's (1970) Cascade model describes levels of service based on the severity of problems. As the severity in- creases, the level of intervention increases. Students with the least severe problems are handled in regular classrooms and, where necessary, teach- ers make use of consultation, supplementary teaching, or treatment. Stu- dents with more serious problems receive additional help in resource rooms or special classes. Students with severe problems are served in special schools, residential schools, or hospitals. In this model, the as- sessment team decides not only what interventions are appropriate, but also in what environment they should be employed.

Prescriptive Assessment Models

Efforts to link assessment data to specific interventions have provided a variety of models that are used in educational settings. The behavioral model is perhaps the most succinct and commonly used prescriptive as- sessment process. Its simplicity and direct link to interventions for iden- tified problem behaviors make it attractive to educatots. While it has re- peatedly been demonstrated as an efficacious approach in varied settings and for many kinds of behaviors, it does not provide a clear framework for deciding at which service level on the cascade to employ interven- tions. By itself, the behavioral model is not a system or process for decid- ing how far up the cascade the referral must go for interventions to be effective and still meet the least restrictive criteria. Another way of de- scribing the model's limitation is that it is difficult to differentiate sev- erity in terms of response frequencies alone. It is probably the most useful approach for planning interventions that are to be applied in the setting where the problem behavior is occurring. Newcomer (1980) described a model for classifying and determining the severity of problem behavior which includes 14 different assessment variables (e.g., intensity - how disruptive; appropriateness - how reason- abln(frequency; duration; specificity, generality - how many situations). She has attempted to operationalize such variables by developing a three- level scale with criteria for "Normal," "Problem," and "Referable" be-

65 Braaten

haviors. For example, a variable is described as "normal" when it has "little or no effect on others." "Problem" describes behavior that has "considerable effect on others." Behavior that has an "excessive effect on Others" is.calred "referable." The classification criteria are accompanied by additional criteria for determining the degree of disturbance, ex- pressed in terms of mild, moderate, and severe. An example from this component isocial functioning, where mild disturbance is described as "usually able to relate to others." Moderate is defined as "usqally unable to relate to otners" and severe is defined as "not able to relate to others" (p. 111). Newr:omer's model includes a structure for operationalizing re- ferral criteria, but is limited because it is primarily a screening rather than a prescriptive approach and it falls short of linking assessment data to levels of service. Gearhart and Willenberg (1974) described a tridimensional prescriptive educational model, which calls for determining the student's needs, de- ciding a course of action, and implementing a remediation plan. The three dimensions of the model are needs assessment, contingency man- agement. and resource allocation. The conceptual model was developed primarily for use with instructional rather than behavioral problems, but it does suggest a prescriptive structure for organizing behavioral data with specific attention to required resources. It does not include a struc- ture for determining an appropriate service level of intervention for be- havior problems. Hewett and Taylor (1980) suggest that the gap between assessment data and practice can be bridged by comparing the student to one of six levels of learning competence and converting "disturbance" to "lack of compe- tence." They say "This lack of competence, when specifically stated, be- comes the educational definition of emotional disturbance for the child and provides a direct link to the setting of curriculum goals" (p. 99). The six successive levels of competence are: attention, response (motor and verbal), order, exploratory, social, and mastery. Evaluation consists of de- termining at what level of competency the student is functioning and the negative behavior Nariants (too much or too little at each level). Each learning competency level includes a list of objectives from which inter- vention plans are determined. Two advantages of the Hewett-Taylor model are that it determines defini- tion by student'S learning needs,.and that the learning competencies are sequenc:ed in such a waY' that they are linked to different kinds of inter- ventions. Like the behavior model, however, the objective-intervention links appear to be within a given environment. ,The competency levels are not discussed in relation to the Cascade model and are highly sugges- tive of aggessment and intervention within a special class. It is not clear from the levels of learning competency and tfx, learning goals how evalu- ators should decide whether to select a regular class, resource room, spe- 1:ial class, or special school for the student. Howell (1981) reviewed 200 randomly selected descriptions of assess-

66 A Model for Differential Assessment and Placement

ment processes in educational settings. He found that all of them could be described on three dimensions. The first dimension includes the types of instruments usedraticg scales, observation, tests, and interviews. The second dimension is the source of dataclient, professional, family, and peers. The third dimension is the orientation of the evaluatorclient centered or situation centered. He concluded that -most procedures summarize behavior, but do not provide operational standards to which behavior can be compared. Evaluator's intuition has been the operational standard. Even the "behavioral" observations and rating, which provide an alternative to projective assessment, he says, "are often nothing more than sophisticated, behavior summaries" (p. 39).

Howell & McGlothlin (1978) suggested an ecobehavioral approach toas- sessment, in which behavior is viewed in the context in which it occurs. Evaluators must remember that "disturbed" children do not havea mo- nopoly on problem behavior. Often, disturbing behaviorsare quite under- standable and perhaps even appropriate responses to environments that fail to meet children's legitimate needs. Curran and Algozzine (1980) have described evidence that supports the view that teachers respond dif- ferently to disturbing beha.7.12k and suggest that relationships can be op- tirnized by carefully considering the effect each has on the other. Given the fact that we have no precise instruments or methods for assess- ing disturbing behaviors and for determining interventions, assessment models must attempt to describe the optimal parameters. Further, it is inevitable that assessment information be subjected to clinical judgment. Therefore, Morse roncluded that, Each working group ... which makes up the special education tearn will have to develop dimensions which are critical to them and decide how to go about as- sessing these dimensions. If they do not, the expensive effort of identification will end up with the label assigned, rather than knowing the student. (1978, p.11) Zabel, Peterson, Smith, and White (1981) questioned teachers and identi- fied 15 types of information which are typically included in special edu- cation placement as well as in reentry assesknents. They include IQ scores; standardized achievement scores; psychological reports; vision,, hearing, and language screening; health histories and family information; teacher assessments of anecdotal records and behavioral status; criterion- referenced academic evaluations; statements of educational and behav- ioral goals; subjective evaluations of student needs; interventions already attempted; expected data for achieving goals; behavior rating scales and checklists; descriptions of regnlar class expectations; formal observation data; -Ind sociometric self-concept data. The following proposed model will oescribe a process by which these kinds of information can be orga- nized to form direct links to the levels of intervention on the Cascade model.

7 6 67 Braaten

A Model for Assessment and Placement

A conceptual model of assessment, which will provide fordifferential evaluation and placements of students, must be broad enough in scope to weigh the full range of problem behaviors, from those considered mild to the most disturbing or severe. In the area of human behavior, where values and perceptions are inescapably part of the evaluation process, any approach will be imperfect. The goal here is toorganize subjectivity in a way that enables evaluators to plan interventions and placements within the context of a full range of special education services. It is as- sumed here that the foremost question is how to match services to stu- dents' needs, rather than what diagnostic label to apply to theh problems. It is also assumed that the assessment and intervention decisions are completed by a multidisciplinary group, rather than by an individual. The sections that follow present a model for decision making.Detailed descriptions of information that should be considered are included, but the assessment team must decide how to obtain data and who willbe re- sponsible. The sections are: identification, chronicity, observational mea- sures, personality and behavioral patterns,academic achievment, medi- cal/physical severity factors, response to interventions, positive student attributes, and environmental characteristics. Finally, a conceptual model is presented in which the gathered data can be integrated in a structured way to determine appropriate placement and interventionde- cisions.

Assessment Variables Identification: Situational Versus Pervasiv,-,.. /first step is the identification of a problem. The focus is to determine who perceives the referred student's behavior as a problem, where the behavior occurs, and under what circumstances. Information is collected from reportsand in- terviews with individuals in all of the primary elements of thestudent's ecosystem: home, community, and school, as well as from thestudent. the initial task is to determine the extent to which the student'sbehavior is perceived as consistent across settings or is associated with specific situations. Questions that will determine the pervasiveness of theprob- lem behavior are organized into the elements of the student's environ- ment, beginning with the school. In school. It is important to have clear and comprehensiveinformation from the school setting. The data should answer how the student re- sponds to teachers, classes, or academic tasks, time of day, support staff, administrators, and peers. 1. Teachers. Which teacher(s) has indicated a concernabout the stu- dents? Does the student appear to respond differently to teachers on the basis of their experience, gender, age, or race?

65 A Model for Differential Assessment and Placement

2. Classes. How does the student behave in high competency classes such as English, math, or science, or other required c1asg9s in which he or she is not interested, compared with those the student at. nears to enjoy? Is there a different response to various learning situatio large versus small groups, active versus passive, high versus low structure? Are as- signed tasks accepted, attempted, and completed? 3. Place. Where do the perceived problems occur: classroom, hall, gym, lunchroom, lavatories, school grounds, bus? 4. Time. Are the problems consistently noted at the beginning, middle, or end of the school day, or before or after a specific class? Do they appear to increase as the day progresses? 5. Support Staff. How does the student respond to the social worker, counselor, nurse, or other support staff? Does he or she seek and accept guidance? 6. Administration. How does the student respond to the principal? How often is he or she suspended or referred to the office for discipline problems? Is the administrator used by staff as.a reinforcer for positive behaviors? 7. Peers. How is the student perceived by peers? Does he or she appear to respond differently to peer groups based on characteristics such as sex, age, or race?

At home. Obtaining accurate and reliable information from parents is of- ten difficult for a variety of reasons. Parents are generally not familiar with the jargon used by professionals and many parents are not skillful in expressing themselves. All too often they feel distrustful and threatened, or are angry for what they may regard as injustices to their child. Whether the parents have initiated the assessment themselves or are responding to a school concern, be they supportive or hostile, it is important thatthey be interviewed by sensitive and skillful staff. The task, again, is to learn how the student is perceived at home, by tiarents, siblings, and other rela- tives, with respect to duties, responsibilities, use of unstructured time, hobbies or special interests, and so on.

In the community. Accurate informaticrn about the student's behavior in the community is typically the most difficult to collect. Often the assess- ment team must rely again on the parentsforinuch of the data. Any infor- mation that can be collected is helpful in completing a description of the student's behavioral patterns. Reports should include descriptions of the student's relationships with peers and adults in the neighborhood as well as in any social or recreational organization. If public authorities arein- volved, such as county welfare workers or the courts, their concerns and records should be included. Also, if public or private service agencies, such as a mental health center, have been involved, their findings are im- portant. Finally, if the student has had a job(s), information about perfor- mance and relationships is helpful.

. 69 78 Braaten

Self. Most often referrals are initiated by teachers or parents, but some students do seek help themselves. Regardless of how the student is iden- tified, his c:r her perception is also important to the intervention planning process. With older students, particularly adolescents, their perceptions of themselves and others may have a significant bearing on interventions that may be recommended. Stressors. This section should include information on any significant or traumatic event that has recently occurred which may be related to the behaviors causing concern. Events such as a death in the familly, divorce or remarriage, serious accident'S or illness, parent's loss of a job, or some other sources of stress have implications for intervention decisions. This set of assessment data is primarily concerned with determining the extent to which 'the problems perceived appear to be related to specific situations, or are pervasive across settings. The findings have direct im- plications for making decisions regarding interventions. Fdi example, when problems are found to be related to a specific classroom or all aca- demic classes, but are not reported in other areas of the school, home, or community, the interventions may focus on modifying the situation be- tween the student and teacher(s). On the other hand, if problems are re- ported throughout the school, home, and cemmunity environments, in- tervention may require placing the student in a highly specialized orogram involving community resources. When a student has referred him- or herself and appears to be functioning satisfactorily, he or she may be offered counseling within the school or may be referred to a commu- may agency. From a more traditional diagnostic perspective, implications can also be drawn from these data which might suggest that those students whose problems are pervasive may be determined to be emotionally disturbed. In contrast, students whose behav!or is related to specific situations might be more appropriately regarded as disturbing. Another way of viewing this information is by attempting to determine the extent to which the student is able to discriminate the expectations of different en- vironments, manage the varying sour:es of stress, and behave in accept- able ways. Acute Versus Chronic. Typically, the information needed for this sec- tion is collected simultaneously with the previous information. The task is to determine if the disturbance is acute or chronic by establishing when the problems were initially perceived. For our purpose, acute may be de- fined as any sudden or recent change in behavior, or the acceleration of behaviors that have been cause for concern for a period up to one year. Chronic may be defined as problems that have caused concern for one year or more. In addition, it is helpful to consider the initial identification of problem behaviors in relation to the normal sequence of events through which children progress at home and school. Specifically, were problems identified before the child entered school, in the primary grades, the intermediate grades. or in junior or senior high school? This

70 Of

A Model for Differential Assessment and Placement

information may indicate how well the student has been iible to adjust to transitions. Also, the team will note whether the disturbgnce was identi- fied following a stressful event, such as those mentioned in the previous section. It should be emphasized here that a lengthy, detailed social history is not considered necessary, and for that matter, may not be very useful. Learn- ing how long the behavior(s) has been lierteived as a problem may have little value beyond indicating how resistant to change it may be. How- ever, knowing whether the behavior is related to a traumatic or transition event may have implications for the kind of support or structure that the student will need. For example, it is common for many students who function successfully in elementary school to begin demonstrating diffi- culties in junior high school. For these students, their response to the change in school structure may 'have clear implications for intervention plans.

Observational Measures The information collected in this portion of the assessment is a clear and precise description of behaviors that are viewed as inappropriate or male- daptive. It is helpful to conceptualize these behaviors in terms of excesses (those that should decrease or be eliminated) and deficits (those that need to be added or increased). The observable, problem behaviors can be listed and described on measures of frequency, duration, or latency. In addi- tion, discrepancy measures and antecedent and consequent events pro- vide valuable observation data.

Frequency Measures Frequency measures are used most often and apply to most disturbing behaviors. Frequency measures are recorded in rates per some unit of time ranging from minutes to weeks, depending on the behavior being recorded. For exiAmple, fighting or tardiness would be best measured in rates per week 0,0month, while class disruptions may be best measured in rates per hour of day.

Duratif Recordings Duration recordings measure how long specific behaviors last from onset to cessation. For example, how long do tantrums last, how much class time does the student miss because of tardiness or absences, or how quickly doe,s he or she settle down after becoming angry?

Latency Recordings Latency recordings measure the amount of time which passes from when

71 ..Braaten

a stimulus is presented until the desired response occurs. For example, when the teacher asks the student to begin an assignment, how long does the student take to begin the task?

Discrepancy Measures By themselves the previous measures can be very misleading. The data are much more meaningful when they indicate how discrepant the stu- dent's behavior is compared with that of other classmates. It may be an injustice to focus on the disturbing behavior of one student when others iu the class are behaving in the same way. Discrepancies are best stated in terms of how likely it is, more or less, that the student will behave differ- ently from classmates. For example, John disrupts the class eight times more often than the other students, takes three times as long to settle down when he gets angry, and twice as long to get started on his assign- ments.

Antecedents and Consequences Two other kinds of daia required for observational measures are the an- tecedent and consequent events. It is important to know what events oc- cur immediately before the disturbing behavior and appear to set it off, what happens after the behavior, and what appears to reinforce it. Collec- tively, the data from direct observational measures can provide an accu- rate description of the problem behaviors, indicate the magnitude of the problem, and provide a means of evaluating the success of interventiOn. The data may be on as few as'one or two behaviors, or on a long list of behaviors that are viewed as disturbing. Each of the previously described kinds of measures can be reported in averages or close approximations when the assessment team is consider- ing changing the student's school placement as an intervention, such as . into a special class or special school. However, when the interventions being considered may be implemented in the enVironment where the problems are occurring, the measures should be as accurate as possible.

The Identification of Affective, Cognitive, and Behavior Pat- terns Traditionally, the process of identifying affective, cognitive, and behavior patterns includes the use of formal psychometric tests or other instru- ments and interviews by psychologists and/or psychiatrists, This process is what is usually referred to as the "psychological assessment." Within this assessment model, the use of classification labels, such as "adjust- ment reaction," or "neurotic" or "psychotic" disorders, are not viewed as helpful, but a description of affectiVe and behavioral patterns is useful in anticipating the student's likely response to different interventions. The

72 81 A Model for Differential Assessment and Placement

data included are from formal and informal projective tests, clinical inter- views, rating scales, and observation. Three essential descriptions are needed: affective attributes, interpersonal relationship orientations to- ward peers and adults, and the most prevalen57 observed pattern(s) of behavior. f

Formal Psychological Tests. The usefulne `cs of these instruments to educators for diagnosis and intervention plann ng isclegarded by many as questionable. As discussed previously, there is ample reason not to rely on these tests for diagnostic decision; however, when the response pat- terns are interpreted in relation to the observations of individuals who know the student well, test resulfs may be helpful by reinforcing observa- tional reports. In a sense, they may add a degree of confidence. On the other hand, when the results are inconsistent with other reports, they may be useful as a stimulus for further questioning and clarification. In either case, the purpose of psychological tests is not to label, but to deter- mine primary affective and cognitive patterns, and whether they are con- sistent with the observed behavior patterns. The decision of which, if any, instrument(s) to use will, of course, vary with the age and characteristics of the student. In the view of this writer, tests should be regarded as optional rather than essential. Clinical Interviews. Generally, clinical interviews are done by psychol- ogists, psychiatrists, social workers, or other mental health professionals. Their interpretations of the student's perceptions and response patterns are less influenced by the stresses felt by teachers and parents experienc- ing day-to-day concerns and frustrations. From this perspective, their contributions to the assessment can help to maintain a more objective focus. Interpretations from clinical interviews provide helpful informa- tion in much the same way as projective tests. When the findings are con- sistent with other sources of data, they may strengthen considerations for specific interventions; when there are differences, the results may stimu- late questions for further classification. Rating Scales and Checklists. Of all the instruments and processes used to identify and evaluate children and youth, rating scales and check- lists are probably the most frequently used by educators. As with projec- tive tests, a great variety are available, and many have problems associ- ated with them. They can and do provide useful information Some scales, such as the Quay-Peterson (1967), can be used to describe primary response patterns in addition to how severe the rater perceives the prob- lem to be. Scales and checklists provide the rater's perception of problem behaviors, which can be used to identify specific behavioral objectives for the intervention plan. The usefulness of information from rating scales can be improved in a variety of ways. Allowing different individuals, including parents, to complete a form independently will indicate how consistently or differ- ently the student's behavior is perceived. Forms jointly completed by a

73 Z`..! Braaten

group of individuals may increase the reliability of the ratings. A third way to improve the information is to repeat the ratings over sumpsive time intervals..Hom er the rating scales are completed, their illagnostic value is in clarifying dominant patterns of behavior. In this portion of the assessment,- the task is to assemble predictable pat- terns from, formal lisviliological evaluations, rating scales, interpersonal relationships, observed behaviors, and affective descriptions. It can be colisiderod a personality or -general tendency assessment.-The informa,- Hon is useful for deterMining the kinds of support and type of structure the Student will most likely respond to positively.

_ Potential Versus Achievement l'aihne on acadeinic tasks is a primary source of stress for youngsters in scluml. A thorough evaluation of achieved skills and deficits is impor-

, timt,,not only fon detalinining specific instructional objectives, but also for assuring an opporlunity fon success, personal growth, and-a sense of lior the 'purpose of this assessment model, the basic areas of information required are outlined. More detailed information on specific evaluation prqcesses and instruments can be found elsewhere (Gearhart Willenberg, 1974; fiarnmi.i& Bartel,,1975; Wallace & Kauffman, 1978). Assessed Potential (I.Q.). Measures of estimated potential for emotion- ally disturbed children are often of questionable validity and, in many (Rises, may have little impact on the final intervention plans. HoweVer, these medsures uin help to answer questions concerning strengths and weaknesses in learning and they provide an indication- rif whether or not tlw student's achievement iS near what may be ryasonably expected. A wide sCdtter pattern versus an even profile may help to explain consisten- cies or inconsistencies in perfmmahce. Often I.Q. scbres are used adrnin- istrativelv to determine eligibility for particular programs.

ACIIIPVPIT1f111Thprviri multitude of standardized and isiterion-refer- enced instruments available to evaluate reading; spelling, and writing achievement. The data collected should include criterion-referenced tesk, but grade-equivaleqscores may be adequate for program placement decisions. Most children ivarn to use language Sdequately. but when awn ire indications of delays in language development, speech disor- ders. or any other concerns about receptive or expressive language skills, more formal assessments should be included. In mathematics, three areas of skills shoulil be included: computation, concepts, and application. Evaludtion of academic skills and areas related to achievement in school d critical component of the assessment process in education settings. he amount of detailed information required at the placement decision level will vary with how highly correlated maholaptive behavior appears to be associated with acadernk. failure. Disturbing behaviors that are

, 74 A Model for Differential Assessment and Placement

highly associated with leaTning situations will have much different inter- vention implications than those that are more pervasive across settings. s. Medical/Physical Evaluations Medical evaluations are a routine component of the assessment process. The obvious question is, what, if any, medical/physical problems may ex- plain or contribute to the problems of the student? Students who exhibit possible perceptual motor problems should be evaluated to determine if there are impairments or delays in fine or gross motor development which may contribute to the student's stress in school: A medical/physical evaluation should include information on the stu- dent's general health, diet, sleeping habits, physical maturation, physical stress symptoms, and/or chemical use and/or abuse. These data provide a 44 basis for ruling out physical illness or disabilities as causal or contribu- ting factors. It also may rule out the involvement of a physician in inter- vention planning. Where students are currently receiving medical treat- ment, 'such as behavior or mood-altering medication, the effects of the treatment need to be included in the assessment.

The Perceived Severity of the Problem The most diffiGult and subjective task in the assessment process is deter- mining the Severity of the problem. Severity is viewed in many different ways. For example, in diagnostic models that define emotional distur- bance as a condition within the student, "adjustment disorders" are less severe than "neurotic disorders," which in turn are not as severe as "psychotic disorders." Educational jargon usually describes the degree of disturbance in terms of mild, moderate, and severe. In the behavioral ap- proach, severity is often judged in terms of the frequency of the maladap- tire behaviors. From t1w-cological perspective, severity is viewed as the relative "disturbingness" of the individual's behavior to other people on some scale ranging from "not disturbing" to "very disturbing." The severity of problem behaviors can be evaluated by constructing a scale of disturbingness in levels of priority. These scales should include references to the effects of the disturbing behavior on peers, teachers, self, and others, and interventions that usually interrupt the problem behav- ior. The levels of priority can be described in relation to corresponding levels of service on the Cascade model. Because perceptions of disturbing behavior vary, evaluators will ultimately have to define each level of pri- ority for themselves. A scale of severity corresponding to the levels of service in the Cascade model is described in terms of "priority." The concept of priority is used because severity is a subjective judgment by the rater(s) and indicates a relative need to intervene, not a specific label. The reference to priority

8,i, 75 Braaten

reflects the fact that the values, skills, tolerance levels, responses, and collective needs of individual teachers, schools, school systems, and communities vary considerably. For example, behavior viewed by some as a low priority may be judged by others as a moderate priority. Table 1 presents an exam* of how the perceived severity of disturbing behavior can be described on a scale in terms of priorities. By itself, this scale is nb more or less useful than any other measure.' yo make it more useful, each assessment team must operationalize, or sys- tematize, their subjectivity, by identifying and ranking disturbing behav- iors and matching the interventions and resources. Because perceptions of disturbingness vary, there can be no "correct" set of criteria. Table 1 can be used as a guide for assessment teams to develop their own criteril Table 1 Perceived Intensity/Magnitude/Degree Low Priority: I. No or minimal stress/disruption to peers 4.2. No or minimal stress demonstrated by the subject :3. Concern felt, but minimal stress on teacher, may elect to intervene 4. No or minimal stress indicate I by other significant adults Examples: Incomplete assignments. reluctant participation Mild Priority: 1. Disrupts and'or stresses peers. 2. Frustration or stress reported or demonstrated by subject 3. Interferes with instruction, requires teacher intervention 4. May require intervention by administrator, support staff, and.or parent Examples: Skipping classes, clowning "Moderate Priority: i. Peers complain or otherwise seek adult intervention 2. Clear agitation. frustration, or stress reported or demonstrated by subjmt :3.Interferes repeatedly or significantly with instruction 4. Requires support staff and adMinistrative intervention 5. Requires notice to parents and assessizient referral Examples: Escalating truancy, fighting, defiance, or avoidance; some confusion between real and unreal High Priority: ExCessivP disruption and. or threatens peer-; 2. Generalized frustration, arienation. or agitation reported or demonstrated by subject 3. Teacher feels exasperated and .or threatened 4. Requires immediate intervention by administration arid "experts" 5. Requires parent interventiOn 6. May require intervention of other authorities. e.g., police, child protection. Examples: Persistent disruption. assault, pervasive inappropriate responses Urgent Priority: Extreme stress or disruption in any or all environments 2. Disturbance escalating beyond interventions available; requires continuous "expert" intervention. Examples: Life threatening to self or others, chemical dependency, runaway, confuses real and unreal

Zi 76 A Model for Differential Assessment and Placement

for levels of priority. Note that at each priority level there is a measure of disturbance as perceived by peers, the stud6nt, the teacher, other signifi- cant adults, and a measure of the intervention required to interrupt the disturbing behaviors. Also, there are examples of behaviors that may re- flect the relative degree of disturbingness. The priority increases as the degree of stress felt byone or more persons increases together with the 'amount and kind(s) of intervention required to interrupt the disturbance. Further description of each level of priority is accomplished by combin- ing key elements of the various sections of the assessment data in col- umns and developing corresponding scales. Table 2 is an example of how frequency, intensity multiple problems, and chronicity might be scaled and compared. Viewed separately, each column of the "Sample Assess- ment Rating Scale" provides a, different way of determining the priority alai probable level of intervention for disturbing behaviors.

The "Frequency"' column clearly suggests that the more often the disturb- ing behavior occurs, the higher the priority. For example, disruptive be- havior that occurs once a day or less may be cause for concern for a teacher, but rates of Once, twice, or more an hour almost certainly will

Table 2 Sample Assessment Rati igs Scale . . Exigency Frequency Intensity Multiple Duration Low Rate per day: Minimal stress/Dysfunction 0 to 1',' 2. Priority 1 or less disruption to limited to one months I 11 , self, peers, or primary (Reverse scale' tea(her concern, e.g., for deficits) task avoidance Mild Rate per day: Stress.. Dysfunction 11/2 to :3 Priority 1 73 disruption includes two ormonths 12) requires teacherthree primary

intervention concerns . Moderate Rate per day: Stress:- Dysfunction 3 to 9

Priority 3 - 5 . disruption kicludes task months 13( Rate per hour: requires .and peer or 1 - 2 . teacher, adult support staff, relationship and-parent intervention High Rate per day: Stress: Success limited9 to 12 PrMrity 5 - 7 disruption to special or months [41 Rate per hour: requires structured 2 4 "expert- program intervention i r rgent Rate per day: Stress: Few or no areas12 or more Priority (5) 7 or more 0isroption of successful months ,Rate per hour: requires functioning 4 or more removal from regular class

77 8 6 Braaten

require some intervention. Other behaviors, however, such as fighting, may occur infrequently, but because of the stress they produce, result in higher priority rankings under "Intensity." The "Durationi' column indicates the persistence of the problems. Prior- ity increases with chronicity. Similar scale eolumns can be developed to rank the personality/behavior patterns, academic skill deficits, medical/ physical disabilities, and other information collected. The scales are structured, subjective guides for the assessment team to begin to form conclusions about an appropriate level of intervention. Each student will present a different pattern on the scales and specific problems may have different priority rankings that will have to be weighed to determine a level of intervention. For example, Bill fights once or twice a month (low frequency), producing much stress (high in- tensity) for the past three months (mild duration), with no other signifi- cant school or home problems (low multiple). Or, John gets out of his seat two or three times per hour, talks out of furn, teases other students, hn- ishes few assignments, has few friends, is a discipline problem at home, and has been presenting droblem behavior for two years (high-frequency, moderate-intensity, moderate-midtiple, and urgent chronicity). Many other variations can be described, but obviously scaling subsets of de- scriptive data alone does not provide a clear link to an appropriate level of intervention. A prescriptive link is formed when this jnformation is cornhined with an evaluation of the student's response to interventions that have been attempted. In the model proposed here, the degree of severity i8 determined by the inteiactions between the student and the environment, requiring a corn- bination of data describing the "disturbingness" of the student's behav- iors and the levels of interventions necessary to maintain and build ac- ceptable behaviors. These data,together with the information on pervasiveness, history, specific problem behaviors, and behavior pat- terns, provide the structure for determining an appropriate intervention at the least restrictive level.

Response to Interventions The previous sections have focused on the student's perceptions of self and other's perceptions of the student, factors that may contribute to the -- disturbing behavior, and the severity of that behavior. This component parallels the initial identification section, but focuses on the specific in- terventions that have been attempted, for how tong, and with what out- comes. The information shouldin'clude school, home, and community efforts to intervene, as well as the student's own efforts. At School. Within the school enyironment there are a wide variety of interventions that may be used, and are often tried, in order to change student behavior, The assessment should include data on how the stu-

78 A Model for Differential Assessment and Placement

(lent has responded to each intervention or combination of interventions. tried. Within the regular classroom some interventions include: consultation with the teacher; modifying the classroom environment; modifying or in- dividualizing instruction; notes, calls, or conferences with parents; con- tingent praise or attentiom special privilege's, jobs, or events; enlistment of aid from peers; incentive systems, including charting, points, or con- tracts; time out; detention; and refe-,al to the office. With support staff, interventions include: counseling, either individual and/or group; moni- toring and reinforcemeut; parent contacts; and health screening.

Other in-school alternative interventions irmiude: Title Ibasic skills classes; "pocket school.' programs jschool within a school); support groups such as Alateen or cultural enrichment-.)ups for minori.ty stu- dents; work release; and special project programs. Administrative interventions include: "talking to"; suspension; parent conferences; room, teacher, school changes; modified day; file charges ith cnurt. e.g.. for truancy; and reinforcement and encouragement. Spe- (:ial education interventions already tried may include: observation, as- ses'.ment. and consultation; reinforcenmnt and monitoring; resource room (one to three hours per day); and special classes. At Home. Interventions at home focus on what parents, siblings, and other relatives .are Using or have tried, in an attempt to interrupt disturb- ing behavior and on how the student responds. Parents' interventions may include: supportive timeencouragement, praise, recreation, and personal attention; structured time for work, play, eating, and sleeping; clefinition of clear limits; contingent privileges or allowance; and punish- ments (e.g.. grounding, spanking). Siblings and other relatives often pro- vide assistance by providing supervision, personal support. andior recre- ational activities. In some instances they may be acting as guardians. In the Community. Included here are the supports tha't have been pro- yided to the parents, as well as to the student. The assessment should include worts on any community-related interventions that have been tried. Public agency services include those by the child protection or fam- ily services divisiops of the welfare department, mental health centers, and the police or court system. Private agency services include those of medical doctors, therapists, organizations such as Big Brother/Sster pro- grams, and parent advisory organizations. Recreational programs such as YMCA/YWCA or the Boys/Girls Clubs that have provided support should also be included in the reports. The family's religious group maalso be a resource. Finally, any .history of residential interventions, Including group or foster homes, hospitals, or treatment centers should be reported. Self-Interventions. Efforts by the student him- or herself to intervene in d disturbing situation may oftea,be overlooked by evaluators. In many instances the student, if mature enough, will attemp to change his or her

79 s Braaten

own behavim and/or relationships with others. In circumstances where the disturbingness of the student is regarded by others as a low or rnild priority, the student may have actually attempted more interventions than the adults around him or her. This may be particularly true when the student is experiencing more stress than others perceive. Many students seek help when their own efforts have been ineffective. The student should be asked what interventions have been tried. Some possibilities could include talking with teachers, counselors, and parents; avoiding conflict situations; ignoring provoking behavior of others; trying to relax, counting to ten; working harder; and asking for help.

Evaluation of Responses. The process for evaluating student responses to interventions is similar to the one used to determine the severity of the problem. The assessment team must organize the interventions into cate- gories and develop a scale that corresponds to both levels of priority (low to urgent) and to the Cascade model. A structure for determining an ap- propriate level of service is provided by matching the studentto an int venilon level at which acceptable behavior is maintained and disturbinb behavior is interrupted. Table 3 is an exairple of how behavioral, instru- mental, environmental, and temporal elements of interventions in school might be organized in scale columns. Other columns might be con- structed for "home," "community," and "self." Note in the "behavioral" column that as the scale increases from low to urgent priority, the inter- ventions become more intrusive. The "Instrumental" column refle -ts in- creasingly more specialized planning, evaluating, and documenting pro- cesses.The"Environmental"columndescribeswhereeffective intervention occurs, and the "Time" column reflects how much interven- tion time is necessary each day.

In addition to developing operational scales, a system that call be used to evaluate the effectiveness of low. mild, moderate, high. and urgei,t levels of intervention must he included. Table 4 is an example of how the stf.f dent's response to interventions can be rather simply assessed and com- pared among environments. The criteria for outcomes are described in terms of "none," "minimal," "temporary," and "successful," kind can be applied to each level of intervention employed. Using the scales and the "Summary of Responses to Level.s of Interven- tion," the assessment team can assemble a detailed picture of how effec- tive diffeamt treatments are, or may he, in different settings. For example, the findings may show that low or mild level interventions are not effec- tive in regular classrooms, but are successful in a resource or Title room. Or, they might show that lower level interventions aresum:essful in the regular classroom only when they are combined with higher level interventions by support staff, administrators. and parents. The areas that are crossed out on the table indicate tlmt urgent interventions are not available to regular classrooms and mild interventions are an not a community, response.to disturbing behaviors, Whatever the pattern. these data, combined with the assessed priority and descriptive informa-

80 A Model fOr Differential Assessment and Placement

Table 3 Sample Levels of Intervention Behavioral Instrumental Environmental Time Low "A look," nod,Note, written Regular class Minimal (I) proximity report, grades change seating reminder, . reprimand, conference, redirect, ignore, praise, model Mild Scold, refer to Reports, charts Regular class, Requires 00 office, points, modifiedmodified room repetition withhold materials arrangement, and privilege, changed class or monitoring parent schedule conference, , contingent attention, d('tention, monitoring Moderate Planned 1EP, Special education One to 1111) counseling, comprehensive class(es) Title I, three suspensica, assessment, other structure hours parent reports, charts, daily conference, individualized role play, materials. inclass time contracts out High Formal IEP, Modified day, Minimum (IV) suspension, individualized transfer to differentof four out of class cuniculurn, dailyschool, primary hours time outs, behavior placemmt in daily daily monitoring and special ed, ' counseling: feedback, full community agency individual or token economy groups program, court order . lTrgent Physical LEP, formal Restricted 5 to 24 V. VI) restraint, criteria for returnmovement special 24 hours seclusion timeto mainstream school, residential, out, hospital medication

9t1 81 v Braaten

Table 4 Summary of Responses to Levels of Intervention RegularSpecialSupport LevelOutcome Class Class Staff HomeCommunityDuration None

7, ' Minimal 5 ... Temporary Successful _None Minimal 2 Temporary Successful

a, None 2 Minimal 1.. .?., Temporary 7e: Successful None Minimal =o.c Temporary Successful

None . ::: Nlinimal

Siiccessful _ Duration - Number of weeks:months the intervention was tried. None = No observed change in whavior or increase in disturbingness. Minimal -= Interrupts inappropriat behavior but must be repeated daily or more frequently to suppress inappropriate behavior and maintain desired behavior. Temporary = Desired behavior is maintained only with periodic interventions (e.g.. on( e a week). Successful Desired behavior is sustained at least six weeks without further intervention.

82 A'Model for Differential Assessment and Placement

hon. provide an assessment structure with a direct link to an educational level of service, suggesting specific intervention procedures.

Positive Student Attributes Intervention plans must be based on areas of strengths as well as deficits. This section describes skills and characteristics which are viewed by the student and others as capabilities or positive attributes. Factors to con- sider include academic, personal, 'interpersonal, physical, and preferred activities. Academics. What competencies does the 'student have in basic skills classes or subjects of special interest? Also, what communication skills, perceptual-motor development, or prevocational or vocational skit ts does the student demonstrate? Personal. What positive personal attributes are used to describe the stu- dent by peers, teachers, support staff, members of the community, and parents? How does the student describe him- or herself? Interpersonal. What is described as positive in relationships with peers and adulk? Are there special relationships within a particular age or type of group? Physical. Is health, maturation. and, or appearance an asset? Does the studmil have anv special abilities? Preferences. Answers to these quktions may suggest reinforcers that can be included in the intervention plan. What classes or subjects, 110- hies. or activities does the student enjoy? What does he or she do for en- tertainment when alone and when with others'? What does the student need or want? It is sometimes difficult for U,achers anaror parents to think of positive attributes when they feel frustrated or upset about disturbing behavior. The student may also have difficulty, particularly if he or she has re- ceived extensive feedback about his or her dkturbing behaviors. But it is important to clarify strengths and interests as much as possible in order to develop an intervention plan with a positive focus.

The Environment The significance of the environment as a consideration in the assessment process was succintiv tated in a Tom Wilson "Ziggy" cartoon, in which Ziggv, standing before the principal and looking up, says, "Maybe I'm not an underachiever..Mavbe vou are an overexpecter." Often there may be little that can be done to change environments, but assessment teams must consider the environment's influence on the student's behavior and

83 Braaten

the intervention options that are available. Factors to include are sOool (distri(;t). community, and family chaocteristics. The climate of the school is one way of describing the information that is helpful here. In what ways does the school contribute to meeting the safety, security. success, and belonging needs of the student, or to the dis- turbing behaviors ? kVhat is the student-teacher ratio? Are adequate sup- port staff resources available? Are the expectations in the sclmol rigid or accomodative? Are the dkcipline and behavior manangement policies clear and consistently followed? What are the advantages and limitations of the physical plant? It is most important to consider teacher characteristics. Are they experi- emled or inexperienced? Are they flexible or rigid? Are they student-or subject-matter oriented? Are they xxinfident or insecure, sensitive or de- manding, open or closed? Are they well trained?

Family Chnrucleristics. Parents or families are often blamed for the problems of their cLildren. 'fhe fairiwss of this can be argued. but because the home is the student's primary environment. information about tbe family is necessary. Are tlw natural parents present, separated, or di- vorced? [las a parent died? Is there a stepparent? How many children are in the family? Are they living in the home or-nearby? Does the family's ethnic origin include culturally different values. behavior, or language'? What is the socioeconomic level of the fmnily? What stressors is the fam- ily facing, such as need for job, housing, or health care? Is the family sta- ble or does it move frequently? flow much education do the parents have? Are the parents loving, indifferent, or rejecting tmvard the student? Dr the parents value education and ilft' they supportive or hostile toward the school?

Community Characteristics. l'he impact of the community may be subtle or apparent, but ill SWIW ViV thP community will influence pf!F- ( vptio.is and have implications for interventions.It is dll urban, subur- ban. or rural community? Is it conservative or liberal? Is it generally a nmderate. or high socioeconomic community? Does it have a limited or i full range of human services available? The ecological view fm Uses on the significance of the environment. Clearly, behavior that is accepted and even encouraged in one environ- ment may be disturbing and rejected in another. Expectations,tolerance levels, and support services vary from school to school, home to school, and from one community to another. The assessment team itself, being a part of tlw environment. vill reflect those variations and,therefore. must be cautious ahout applying labels such as emotionally disturbed to chil- dren and youth. It must be more concerned with matching services to stu- dents' needs.

0, 1...J 84 A Model for Differential Assessment and Placement

Assessment Summary. The preceding sections discussed the assessment variables that should be considered for placement and intervention decisions. When this assess- ment information is collected, the evaluators will have established a pro- file of the student which will include: how situational or pervasive the disturbing behaviors are; how long they have been perceived as a prob- lem; how severe the problems are perceived to be:and what interventions have been tried with what outcomes. In addition, the team will have col- lected information on academic achievement, medical *history, the stu- dent's strengths and preferences; and significant characteristics of the en- vironment.

A summer!, of the-assessment data can then be organized on a grid form, such as in Table 5, where elements of the data can be ranked in terms of priority aml compared for patterns of consistency or variance. Note that acro;:s the top of the figure, all significant elements of the ecosystem are included: self, school, home, and community. Drawing from the data on severity and response to interventions, the evaluation team can deter- mine a priority level for each element of the ecosystem in relation to the identified disturbing behaviors, the response and relationship patterns, and the outcomes of the interventions that have been attempted. At the bottom of each column, an exigency, or overall priority level can be deter- lnined, which will reflect the team's judgment of the severity of disturb- ingness within each alement of the ecosystem. The first column indicates the student's level of distress in the existing situation. Priority ratings within the school include the degree of disturb- ingiless to peers, teachers, support staff, and administrators, and a com- parison of behavior in regular classrooms with other school environ- ments. Ratings of the home environment will include the student's relationship with siblings and parents, responsibilities such as routine household chores and meeting parent expectations, and the team's judg- ment of the degree of whole family. dysfunction. Community ratings will consider the student's relationships with peers authority figures, and other agencies.

Summarizing the data in the form of priority ratings on this rt.td provides a three-dimensional perspective on the disturbingness of titu student's behavior. It will show where the behavior is a problem. how disturbing it is. and it will suggest what level of intervention would be appropriate. Tlw use of priority ratings on the grid allows for consideration of the spectrum of problems from the ordinary to the most disturbing, and from the highly situational to the most pervasive. By examining the priority patterns, the evaluators can differentially determine where interventions a:e appropriate and what level of special education service to provide. The conversion from priority to a level of special education service i3 straightforward. Recalling the Cascade model, low priority = .consulta- tion; mild priority = instructional changes or supplementary services;

85 9,4 410

Table 5 Assessment Summary Self School Home Community Environment Fern Peers Teachers SS Reg Other Sib Parent Resp Dys Peers AuthorityAgency Behavior:Stress Frequency Intensity Multiple Duration Responst: PatterreRelationshi Aggression Pass Aggress Avoidance Escape Immature Dependent Response to Levels of Int vention Behavioral /7/7/ Program Exigency L Stressors Reinforcers Inhibitors Competencies Specific Problem Behaviors'

Level of Service Indicated 0 No Problem; 1 = Low Priority;2 = Mild Priority;3= Moderate Priority;4 = High Priority;5 -= Urgent Priority 9 A Model for Differential Assessment and Placement

modenite priority =, one to three hours per day in the resource room; high priority = special class with some opportunity for mainstream :experi- ences: and urgent priority special school or residential program. The assessment summary form also includes brief references to sources of stress which appear to contribute to the disturbing behdvior, activities, or items which are reinforcerslor the student, inhibitors, student competen- cies, and a list of target behaviors. Collective 13;4 all of the data on the sum- mary form will provide for a prescriptive evaluation with objectives for specific behaviors, specific interventions, and a level of special education service in the least restrictive environment.

A Conceptual Model

The preceding sections reviewed assessment variables for differential evaluation of disturbing student behavior. This concluding portion pre- sank a conceptual model for organizing or operationalizing assessment data to make placement decisions in special education programs. It is as- sumed that all disturbing behaviors are perceived by the evaluators on some continuum, and that they can be rationally evaluated on a scale of priority without the need for traditional diagnostic classifications. Fur- ther, the task of assessment teams is to develop prescriptive differential evdluat ion systems that place students in appropriate, least restrictive levels of service, as well as provide specific treatments. Differential placenumt assumes that evaluators must make recommendations based on a continuum of services as presented in .the Cascade mod(l. The key variables of the placement model are: situational versus perva- sive behaviors: acute versus chronic histories; and the severity priority of the disturbing behavior. Table 6 is an illustration of bow the variables are organized for differential placement decisions. In the model, disturbing behavior is identified with one of four quadrants, based on its duration and pervatiiveness. Within a quadrant the behavions) is further identified with d cell that describes its severity and duration priority. The quadrants are -acute-situational," "acute-pervasive," "chronic-situ- ational." and "chronic-pervasive." The process for deciding which qua- drant describes the student is simple. First, determine how long the be- havior has been perceived as a problem. If it has been less than one year, the top, or "acute," half of the grid will be used. The bottom, dr "chronic.- half is: used for problems persisting for more Than one year. Secon0, deiermine if the disturbing behavior is primarily situational or pervasive. This can be accomplished by examining the "Assessment Summary" and determining whether the behavior is associated with an identifiable situation or type of situation, or if it is consistent across envi- ronments. If the disturbing behavior is associated with a specific setting, then the left, or "situational," half of the grid will be used. If it is consis- tent across environments, the "pervasive," or right, half will b9, used. It 96 87 Braaten

Table 6 A Model for Planning Special Education Service Levels for Students with Disturbing Behavior

Actite-Sevurily-Priorily AS 1.'Neill High Minkrali. Low-Mild Modvrale High Prp,viii

4. 1 4 747 -::

2- :'"...... r.: - f, .2 - ::.: ,

.-

_ _ ..

7

I, 1

I'rgi.rii iiigh Moderati. 1, -Nlild Mudt.r.iti. Iligh l,IwIli C S C l' Chronic-tie% vritv-Prioritv

should be noted here that the disturbing behavior may be consistent across one environmental setting, such as the school, but may notbe per- ceived as a problem at home or in the community. In this instancek the disturbing behavior is regarded as primarily situational. The result of these two steps will place the student in one of the four quadrants. Once the appropriate quadrant has been identified, the evaluators must determine which cell most accurately describes the student. The two oi- mensions within each quadrant are, "severity priority" and ".duration priority." The severity priority is derived from the combination of the "intensity scales" and "response to intervention scales" discussed in the preceding sections. The duration priority increases with the amount of time the behavior has persisted, and is further defined. 9 r 8 8 1, A Model for Differential Assessment and Placement

Before discussing each of the quadrants in more detail, the reader should note in Table 6 that at the center of the model is a circle that represents the mainstream educational program. As you proceed away from thecen- ter in any quadrant, the priority increases in severity, duration, or both. The numbers in the cells refer to levels of special education services where: 1 = consultation; 2 = supplementary resources; 3= resource room; 4 = special class; 5 = special school; and 6 = residential school. Tables 7, 8, 9, and 10 provide a more detailed description of the criteria for each of the cells in the quadrants. Remember that the criteriaare pre- sented as a guide, as examples from the author's perception and experi- ence. Each team must define criteria to match its own assessment context, and service levels that are identified with each of the cells should be viewed as probable, least restrictive levels of intervention. Table 7 shows sample criteria for placement decisions in the acute-situa- tional quadrant. Students in this quadrant have been identified forone

Table 7 Acute/Situational Sample Placement Criteria Acute

t irgent High ModerateLow Mild

4 4 1 2.I t lp to one year

: Six to nine inonths: increasing 4 4, .1 2. 1 - deterioration of acceptable behavior

2. 1 (I to 24 weeks.

I., i,,.. Abrupt onset:unanticipated or e. 3 2 .' accelerated increase in maladaptive behavior; zero to six weeks.

, 4 a.--

t, ..... _...... 7, 7 .- -

E.,- E.;2,,...^. . . , '. g '7=.=

L -

7 -= .z.::: ,.. ",..1 , FYi,3,

89 Braaten

year or less and their disturbing behavior isprimarily associated with an identified situation or setting. The kinds of behavior may range from get- ting failing grades ,o assault, or from skippingclass to vandalism. Note that in general, the highest level of placement is a special class. However, an extreme or rapidly acceleratingdisturbance, such as an assault or sui- cide attempt, may require a residential placement. Table 8.shows sample criteria for placement decisions in the acute-perva- sive quadrant. By compL ison to the precrding quadrant, thedisturbing behaviors here are a concern in at least two environments, that is, school and home. Because of the consistency of the disturbing behavior, special schools or residential programs are more probable interventionsfor "high" and "urgent" priority problems, parti;:ularly as the duration in- creases, in order to provide comprehensive andconsistent intervention progre.ms.

Table 8 Acute:Pervasive Sample Placement Criteria

ute

I.M1.N. Illii \ l(iiit'falt. 1 li12,11 1 'It2P111

, 1 'f, Ul OM' ,,,,Ir i 4 5

Sp. to HMV 11t,t1th,.. Int rt'.1,1110. 4 4 i ) dvtt.rtorattoti (It . ttl,t,thlt. litltd tor

.14

Abrupt onset . unant it ipated. or 2 2 v111,11141 In( mise ul tnalaildptil. ...- [wild% lor. /Prt1 ip SI \ 1.1:14.ks E..-:".

- .z...'...1 . 7.- , rz

:..- r::: ..f.. -4:: Ei3 - g w g _ 5 --.

..-.:-

I: ..c. ..--- r. 4,T. -.

' - = F 5' n =_. -., :7 7

90 A Model for Differential Assessment and Placement

Tables 9 and 10 present sample placement criteria for disturbing behavior that has persisted for a long period of time. Because of the history of the behavior, the duration-priority is considered high to urgent. Placement decisions are based more on the severity priority. As above, the important difference between these two quadrants is criteria that refers to behavior in association with situations or across settings. It is tempting here to classify students in these two quadrants as those who are disturbing (chronic-situational) and those who are emotionally disturbed (chronic- pervasive). In a practical sense, the former group is most likely to be rep- resented by students who have traditionally been regarded as "conduct disordered" or "socially maladjusted." Their behavior pattern shows that they do respond selectively to different environments and are unlikely to have a diagnosis of "thought disorder." Often these are the students who are merely tolerated, or who were repeatedly punished while very young, or who will be placed in court-supervised programs when they are older.

Table 9 Chronic/Situational Sample Placement Criteria , 2, :-..r... .:".; . . m. ..a -z

5 'f, .9.:. -..-2, ... .,;. 7;84 .. 8 _ ..,-.. .._..1. .... i -i 5 a 8 = =,.. T. ,..t.! m. E

r z I.': ''' :EI ' ,'--. -77. I '17 7 7 7 .7. '- 8 . 7 7 . . z 82, 4.,- .im

--F:9 V:: E 4 - .i'.: '--, -..r ..z7 E.' - ._, ...c.F .2 = ...t -=. +2 --: ...... 7.: -,...7: ,.. a',,, .._: = 8 S. RT.: = = 2 =', 2 - 7 _a 7 :7"; '7i. FI: 'Z. 7-7 7 6: '.7v: 5 7-!_8"

One Or More years -good weeks, b%id 4 3 weeks

One or more Mrs behdelor patterns 4 2. 1 generally prediutable N.

4 2.I Two Or More Vears 7 7.

...25

5, (1 5, 4 2, 1 At least two years, escalating.

,

Urgent 1110 ModerateLow Mild Prit rity Chronic

1 91 LY Braaten

Table 10 Chronic/Pervasive Sample Placement Criteria

" = co- .....o,,,

.k.--,.. Fr, . s. 3 ..,, m_ :-... a 70c f c = . = 8 6 :-...-'', -.9.. 2" , et c 2 z r o 2, 2 6- :." !.D g' .7.7: c '..1. .- i.A., z c o 741. = - c.... 0 ....7 E. 5.. 4 F -, -0 ? E: °-.. 12. Ye, =o0 F?., 5, c ;a n ='' -o 2 9 - . Y1 i 5 a 7; TO 0 , 't :3 "3 T a , ..7.- .= F.w 7 0- r.... ,,... =. .4.: c 7.' - c.. o c. ..,:. c.,, o 7.: , c -. :.-1 g "0 r..-:

One or rnore v Piers witli intervals of weeks or months of latency. "Good ...... -- 4 weeks'. "liad %yeeks S F..

One or more years. behavior genetaliv 4 predictable \

TW() of MN! WM'S. 1. ' 1 4 7

...i.

At least Iwo years. lesiieldlin12.. I. 2 4

Low NlildNloderate High l'iNent Pr i nity Chronic

The chronic-pervasive group, on the other hand, is most likely to be rep- resented by students traditionally diagnosed as "personality-disor- dered," including the "psychotic." These students have typically been referred to treatment programs. However tempting this kind of classifica- tion is, we are reminded that there is no diagnostic purity andthat at- tempts at classifying the quadrants are more of a retreat totraditional la- beling than prescriptive assessment. In summary, it is important to state that while this modelhas not been implemented on a district-wide basis anywhere, it is being used to place students differentially in special school programs for the emotionallydis- turbed in Minneapolis, Minnesta. Minneapolis Public Schools do pro- vide a full range of service.levels from preschool through high school. Regular education programs are responsible for identifying the needsof students and for attempting the intervention options that are possible

9,1 i A Model for Differential Assessment and Placement

within mainstream buildings. When the "student support team" con- cludes that it is unable to serve the student successfully, a referral is made to a central evaluation committee. The data reviewed by that com- mittee include all of the kinds of information discussed in the previous sec 'ions and placement decisions are based on criteria comparable to those described here. It is true that, for administrative purposes, students who are placed in special classes, special schools, or residential programs are labeled emotionally disturbed, but in assessment conferences the la- bel serves more as a description of the priority for serrice, rather than a classification of the student. Conclusion The assessment and placement of students with disturbing behaviors in special education programs is, at best, imprecise. Judgments are influ- enced by the values, tolerance levels, biases, definitions, and perceptions of the evaluators, and by the resources and values of the community. As special educators, we are responsible for providing programs that meet students' needs in the least intrusive way possible. Our ongoing chal- lenge has been to develop instruments and models which will enable us to match more closely the needs of students and environments. The model presented in this paper represents an "ecobehavioral" approach. The model is based on the assumption that judgment will always be part of the assessment process, but also that the subjectivity of evaluators can be organized in a way that more objectively links disturbing behaviors to appropriate levels, as well as to specific interventions.

Reference List' Bullock,L.vl.,& Zayer, E. I..,Behavio.ral dim( nsions ofbehaviorally disordered andadjudi- cated(it ildrem youth assigned to special programs and the management techn igtws utilized by teachers ofthesechildren/youth:A final research report.Denton: North exas State Uni- versity, Division of Special Ed ucation,1980.

Cullinan; D., & Epstein. M. II. Administrative Definitions of Behavior Disorders: Status and Directions. In F. H. Wood & K. C. Lakin (Eds.), Disturbing, disordered or disturbed? Perspec- tives on the definition of problem behavior in educational settings. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota, Department of Psychoeducational Studies, 1979,

Curran, T. J.. & Algozzine. B. Ecological dkturbance: A test of the matching hypothesis. Behav- ioral Disorders, 1980. 5, 169-174.

Deno, E. Special Education as developmeotal capital. Exceptional Children,. 1970, 37, 229- 237.

Department of I lealth, Education and Welfare, Office of Education, Educatioo of I Iandicapped Children: Implementation of Part B of the Education of the Handicapped Act. Federal Regis- ter, 42 (163), Tuesday. August 23,1977, Part 1142474-42518.

Evans, I. M. & Nelson, R. O. Assessment of child behavior problems. In A. Ciminero, K. S. Calhoun, & H. E. Adams (Eds.), Handbook of behavioral assessment. New York: John Wiley & Sons, 1977.

Gearhart, B. R., & Wittenberg, E. P. Applicat:-1 of pupil assessment information: For the spe- cial education teacher. Denver: Love Publishing Co.,1974.

93 1 0 Braaten

Grosenick, J. K., & fluntze, S. L. National needs analysis in behavior disorders. Columbia: University of Missouri, Department of Special Education, 1980. flammill, D. D., & Bartel, N. R. Teaching children with learning ond behavior problems. Bos- ton: Allyn and Bacon, Inc., 1976.

lewett, F. M., & Taylor, F. D. The emotionally disturbed child in the classroom: The orches- tration of success (2nd ed.). Boston:Allyn and Bacon, Inc., 1980.

Howell, K. W., & McGlothlin, J. E, Evaluation of behavior disorders. In R. B. Rutherford, & A. G. Prieto (Eds.i, Monograph in behavioral disorders: Severe behavior disorders of children and youth. Reston, VA: Council for Children with Behavior Disorders, Summer. 1978.

Howell, K. W. Establishing Criteria for Social Behaviors. In R. B. Rutherford, A. G. Prieto, & l. E. McGlothlin (Eds.). Monograph in behoviorol disorders: Severe behavior disorders of chil- dren and youth. Reston, VA: Council for Children with Behavior Disorders, Summer, 1981.

Kauffman, J. M. A historical perspective on disordered behavior and an alternative concep- tualization of exceptionality. In Disturbing, disordered or disturbed? Perspectives on the definition of problem behavior in educationol settings. Minneapolis: University of Minne- sota, Minneapolis Department of Psychoeducational Studies, 1979.

Morse, W. C., Cutler. R. L., & Fink, A. II. Public school classes for the eMotionolly handi- capped. A research onolysis. Washington, D.C.: Council for Exceptional Children, National Education Association, 1964.

Morse, W. C. Emotionally handicapped: Problems of identification 'and definitiam Conference Proceedings; Emotionally Handicapped Pupils:Total IEP Imp lenwntation Now and The Fu- ture. Raleigh: North Carolina Department of Public Instruction. Division for Exceptional Children, 1979.

Newcomer. P. L. Understanding ond teoching emotionally disturbed children. Boston: Allyn and Bacon. Inc., 1980.

Quay, El. C.. & Peterson, D. R. Manual for the Behovior Problem Checklist. Champaign, IL: Children's Research Cen!,,r, 1967.

Rhodes, W. C.. & Tracy, M. L. A study of child variance: Conceptual protect in emotional disturbonce. Ann Arbor: Urtiversitv of Michigan Press, 1972.

Wallace, G., & Kauffman, J. M. Teaching children with learning problems (2nd ed.). Columbus: Charles E. Merrill Publishing Co.. 1978.

Wood, F. EL Defining disturbing, disordered and disturbed behavior. In F. II. Wood, & K. C. Lakin (Eds.), Disturbing, disordered nr disturbed? Perspectives on the definition of problem behavior in educational settings. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota, Department of l'sy- choeducational Studies, 1979.

Wood, F. IL The influence or personal. social and political factors on the labeling of students, In F. II. Wood (Ed.). Perspectives for a new decade: Education's responsibility for seriously disturbed ond behaviorally disordered children and youth, Reston, VA: The Council for Exceptional Children, 1981.

Wood, F. fl., & Lakin, K. C. (Eds.), Disturbing, disordered or disturbed?' Perspectives on the definition of problem behavior in educational settings. Minneapolis: University of Minne- sota, Department of Psychoeducational Studies, 1979.

Zabel, R. fl.; Peterson. R. L., Smith, C. R., & White, M. A. Placement and reintegration inforMa- lion for emotionally disabled students. In F. H. Wood (Ed.), Perspectives for a rilkv decode: Educator's responsibility for seriously disturbed and behaviorally disordered children and youth. Reston, VA: The Council for Exceptional Children, 1981,

.1

94 (7

Part 2: Planning Public School Programs

104 Perspectives on the Development of Eeucational Programs for the Emotionally Disturbed

Norris G. Haring

Among the professional disciplines that provide services to handicapped children, education has pioneered the effort to serve the emotionally dis- turbed. Educators have produced their most comprehensive and effective intervention and management programs when they have worked together with professionals from the field of special education. Looking back, one can identify those psychological bases from which educators have de- vised specific strategies and interventions within direct service settings. The actual history of education for the enibtionally disturbed, however, can hardly be seen as an incremental series of progressively better educa- tie ,al practices. Rather, in sorting through the primary and secondary re- ports of educational practices in documents and textbooks, one finds that the history of the education of these individuals (up to circa 1950) resem- bles a dance stepone step forward, two steps back. Only as educators realized the effectiveness of applying behavioral principles to the inter- ventioh and education of children and youth with emotional disorders have educational approaches become more systematic.

Developments up to 1950

Before the 1950s, education of children with behavior disorders was con- sidered incidental to their psychological, psychiatric, and medical treat-

97 105 Haring

rnent. Since the middle of this century a number of approaches have been developed for educating these children; the groundwork for these strate- gies, however, was established in the unieteenth century. Like most de- velopments in special education for any categay of the handicapped, these strategies have their theoretical and procedural beginnings in the intense training program developed by Jean Itard, a nineteenth century French physician. Itard developed his procedures through attempts to teach a wild boy, named Victor, found in the Canne forest near Avcyron, France, who apparently had been without human contact from early chi ldhoed. The boy was profoundly retarded and exhibited nuny behav- iors seen in children with,severe bthavior disorders. Itard's assumptions for treatment were based on the notion that Victtir had not learned to use language or to behave appropriately because of inadequate stimulation. This failure had in turn retarded the development of the central nervous system. While his notions were simplistic, the systematic procedures and instructicnal tasks that Itard designed nearly 200 ieiars ago to increase appropriate social and language behaviors still serve as a foundation for the procedures used today with the retarded and the behaviorally diSor- dered. In the nineteenth century Edward Sequin recognized the implica- tions of Itard's proceddres and Maria Montessori applied his techniques to the teachirof the retarded, While education or training was becoming a primary gc lfor retarded individuals, educating the emotionally dis- turbed was considered secondary to the main considerations of their di- agnosis, identification of etiology, and treatment, During much of the nineteenth century, emotionally disturbed children, along with adults, were referred to as being insane, and their treatment was based on superstitious and bizarre assumptions. Education gained some acceptance as a treatment despite these assumptions, however, and by du middle of the century, schools had been established in "insane asylums" and specific teaching methods had been developed (Kauffman, 1976). Educational programs that included such methods as individual assess- ment, highly structured environments, and functional curricula, as well as self-help training in daily life skills began to be developed within asy- lums, This represented an advancement that came about as a result of humanistic educators (Brigham, 1845, 1847, 1848; Howe, 1851; Ray, 1846; Sequin, 1866). These programs were, however, provided primarily for the more severely mentally retarded residents, not-for the behaviorally disturbed (Brigham, 1848; Sequin, 1866). However, educational curricula that included moral treatment were believed to be constructive forces for mental health (Bokoven, 1956), Only sketchy records can be found de- scribing further development of educational intervention with the behav- iorally disturbed during the nineteenth century (Kanner, 1957; Ruben- stein, 1948), Not until a century later were the methods developed for the retarded to become a major influence on the education of children with severe behavior disorders. By the end of the nineteenth century, a general change occurred in the

96 0 b PerspectivPs on the Development of Educational Programs

approach to the treatment of the emotionally disturbed. Psychiatry emerged as a treatment discipline, and various psychodynamic theories were used as the basis for management strategies. The writings of the fi- nal decade or so reveal a reduced irterest in teaching or training and an increased application of psychiatric therapy (Harms, 1967); however, "Psychiatry became increasingly engrossed in varieties of psychody- namic theory, and therapeutic action on behalf of patients gave way often to interest in diagnosis and classification" (Kauffman, 1981, p. 44).

The Mental Hygiene Movement and the Focus on Child Development

The mental hygiene movement, which began in 1909, had a lasting influ- ence on the conceptualization of the etiology and treatment of emotional disturbance. This influence began with the establishment of the National Committee for Mental Hygiene by layman Clifford Beers, psychiatrist Adolf Meyer, and psychologist (Berkowitz & Rothman, 1967). As a result of the activities of this orge nization, child guidance clinics, supported by state and local funds, were organized. Many of these clinics associated themselves with already existing adult-centered

During the 1920s mental hygiene programs were developed in the public schools, and efforts by schools to identify children with emotional prob- lems.focused on the need for cooperation between the schools and local child guidance clinics. Many of the clinics, however, had based their the- ory of treatment on traditional Freudian orientations and had adopted a psychodynamic approach that was incompatible with the more direct ap- proach of the educators. Problems in communication and management arose between the public schools and community child guidance clinics, ançl teachers had difficulty interpreting and applying diagnoses and rec- omendations made by the guidance clinic personnel. A parallel influence was the emergence of the field of child development. The study of the normative development of infants and children began at about the same time as the mental hygiene movement. The respect that Freud:an psychology engendered for the importance of childhood experi- ences contributed to the study of child development and substantiated the predominant role of children's affects and emotions in their overall growth and behavioral development. In 1911 Arnold Gesell founded the Clinic for Child Development at Yale University. Gesell and his associate, Ilg, developed a scale for measuring children's development which in- volved a systematic comparison of individual children with the "norm." This scale was widely used and established the strategy of normative as- sessment, later giving rise-to the developmental approach. One example of the application of this approach was in the behavior clinics established in 1925 by psychiatrist Dr, Smiley Blanton, director of the Minneapolis Haring

Child Guidance Clinic. These clinics, based in kindergartens, took refer- rals from teachers, parents, and preschools. In addition to direct interven- tion with children, they provided counseling to parents and teachers. Both the child guidanco clinics and the developmental approach influ- enced current special education practices in two major areas. They helped shift the focus from seriously disturbed children to a broader focus that included mildly disturbed children, who represented the ma- jority of disturbed children in the public schools (Lewis, 1974). They also established a multidisciplinary treatment paradigm that often included the home and involved a team of professionals who worked directly with children and their families. Psychologists, psychiatric social workers, visiting teachers, and therapists worked together within the clinics to provide the necessary care. The child guidance clinics, combined with the innovations in research, new teacher training programs, and a shift towards a recognition of the importance of direct intervention in the lives of handicapped individuals, led to the beginnings of educational inter- vention facilities for the emotionally disturbed.

The Development of Child Psychiatry

The psychiatric model was based on the traditional conceptualization. of emotional or behavior disorders as diseases. As Kazdin (1978) notes, the model might be more accurately described as the "intra-psychic disease" model. This model had been given some substantiation by the discovery that the syphilitic spirochete caused general paresis. The model pre- vailed in the absence of competing theories of the genesis and treatment of emotional disorders ad has served as a basis tor the language of psy- chology; from it come buch rnisleadins terms as "symptorpatology" and "pathology." The model still influenct our current concepts and affects our current educational and intervention practices. The disease model employs comprehensive medical asset iment, includ- ing analysis of body fluids and tissfies, and electroencephalograms. To the limited extent that remediable causes have been found, this approach has been useful. The model is of limited use, however, in changing male- daptive behavior because not all, or perhaps not even most, maladaptive behavior has a disease or biological basis. Nevertheless, the intrapsychic disease model has hau a powerful influence on psychology and educa- tion. In psychology, behavior is seen as only a symptom of the underlying disorder; in education, reading or other skill disorders are considered symptoms of underlying brain dysfunction. Even though known organic bases can rarely be established, the intrapsychic disease model continues to be applied. That Freud adopted the disease model for his psychoanalytic theory is not surprising. He had been trained in physiology and neurology, and during the late 1800s, when he formulated his theories, there was very

I 00 100 Perspectives on the Development of Educational Programs

- little competition from any other model that successfully explained ab- normal behavior. By the time the psychology of learning began to evolve in the early 1900s, Freud had set forth most' of his ideas, and they had achieved prominence and widespread acceptance. As the science of be- havior grew, experimental psychologists did not use their findings to challenge psychoanalytic theory as a treatment approach. Neither re- . search nor a scientific approach to verification was incorporated into psy- choanalysis. This lack of a verification procedure, combined with the paradigmatic authority of the disease model, further prevented it from be- ing seriously challenged (Kazdin, 1978).

Educational Approaches The first psychiatric hospital for children in the country, Bradley Horrie in Rhode Island, was opened in1931.Dr. Lauretta Bender, an authority in the area of childhood schizophrenia, organized the children'g ward at Bellevue Psychiatric Hospital in New york City in 1934. She convinced the New York City Board of Education to provide two teachers forspecial ungraded classes. Pearl Berkowitz and Esther Rothman, the teachers, were trained in the Bellevue School and were instrumental in the devel- opment of the "600" schools in the New York City school system for edu- cating xlisturbed children. These schools were located in regular school buildings, and occasionally, in residential diagnostic centers. Leo Kanner contributed immeasurably to the development of child psy- chiatry with his textbook, Child Psychiatry (1935). Kanner, in addition to identifying the syndrome of early infantile autism (1943), described the characteristics of various categories of severely and profoundly disturbed children. The inttapsychic approach to normal behavior failed to generate potent treatment techniques, and dissatisfaction with the model produced a con- k text from which behavior modification developed. The behavioral model of deviance which grew out of psychological research helped to provide an identity for psychology independent of medicine. It provided a pew model that enabled researchers to explore areas outside of the old,Vedi- cal model. The theory of 'development, espoused by behaviorist;, pro- vided a concept of deviant behavior 'and treatment methods for behavior change and management which were substantive alternatives to the in- trapsychic disease model and its psychoanalytic treatment method.

The Development and Influence of

Learning theory,was the foundation for behavior modificatiOn. Research in conditioning, reflexology, aod stimulated the objective study of behavior,,and methodological advances made in these areas were applied to the field of behavior intervention in general. The . Haring

basis of behaviorism is the emphasis on overt behaviors rather thanpri- vate experience. John Watson was the first behaviorist ofrecord (1913). He was strongly opposed to the dominant school of psychologyand its focus on covert mental processes, not observable behavior. Eventhough Watson had done some important work in instinctive behavior,he be- came impressed by the human organism'scapacity for learning. He made some rather extreme claims about the potential ofthe human infant, with- out factual support at the time. However, manyof his claims have subse- quently been borne out (Kazdin, 1978). B. F. Skinner was responsible in large part for establishing thefacts that Watson lacked; his work also made possible the development and refine- ment of behaviorism into a technology. Skinner's workclarified the learning paradigms developed by Pavlov and Thorndike. He distin- guished between these two models oh the basis of the type of response and the type of conditioning (Skinner, 1937). Responses that were termed respondent are elicited and are often referred to as reflex responses,such as salivation and knee jerk in response topatellar tap. Operant responses are spontaneous, and no elicitingstimuli may be observed. Operant re- sponses may be more difficult to explainimmediately because their causes are not detectable without furtheranalysis. Skinner concentrated much of his research on operant conditioning, using an investigative pro- cedure known as the experimentaJanalysis of behavior.

The Historical Use of Reinforcement Principles Many systems for consequating desired behavior can be found inearly school programs. While it is quite obvious that these applications of rein- forcement were not based on the systematic findings of thebehavioral laboratory, the functional value of reinforcement has been recognizedfor many years. Long before the laboratoryconfirmation of operant condi- tions, reinforcement principles were used widely. In theearliest exam- ples of teaching, educators used reward systems of one variety oranother. An illustration is the use of the pretzel, shaped to represent achild's arms folded in prayer, which was invented in the seventh centuryA.D., as a reward to children for learning their prayers. Nuts, honey, andfigs were given as rewards for learning religious lessons in Europeduring the 1100s (Birnbau 4962). '114-- Just amewards have been used throughout history tostrengthen desired behavior, punishment has been used in elaborate ways todiscourage un- desired behavior. Many forms of rewards and punishments wereused in education, the military, politics, arid business thousands of yearsbefore Skinner "discovered" the principles of reinforcement in hislaboratory. \The classroom application of applied behavior analysis,concefved and validated by Skinner, was not to emerge for nearly a hundred years,lend- ing credence to a passage in the Biblical book ofEcclesiastes, "There's nothing new under the sun." One of the most systematicapplications of

1021 0 Perspectives on the Development of Educational Programs

rewards in education was Lancaster's Monitorial System (Lancaster, 1805; Salmon, 1904), developed by Joseph Lancaster (1778-1838) for use in the education of disadvantaged children. Given large numbers of these children, limited facilities, and a lack of personnel, Lancaster developed a peer-teacher monitoring system using academically advanced students from the program (Kaestle, 1973). These student monitors were assigned to a variety of teaching tasks, including taking attendance, distributing and collecting completed work, scoring responses, instructing individual students, and even recommending promotion to the next academic level. Student monitors were assigned to each group of 10-12 students. The goal was advancement to a higher level within the group and eventually to a group at a higher academic level. The Lancaster monit6ring system had a fairly elaborate positive reinforcement system. Based on competition, students were rewarded for correct responses. The student in each group with the highest Score in all subjects received the highest rank and a ticket of merit. If he or she was surpassed by another student, the ticket had to be exchanged for a merit, stating that the student had achieved, but did not still hold, first place. Another very early (circa 1880) classroom application of 'reinforcement was the Excelsior School System (Ulman & Klem. 1975). This system pro- vided merits for such appropriate behaviors as punctuality, orderliness, and studiousness. These rewards, called "excellents" or "perfects," were in the form of tokens. They could be exchanged for a special certificate of outstanding behavior and academic performance. The Excelsior system contained a commercially prepared set of materials, including tokens in different denominations, instructions, certificates, and report-to-parent forms. Thousands of teachers throughout the United States used this sys- tem. Educational Models

Several models for the education of emotionally disturbed children have been developed over the past two-and-a-half decades. These models draw from psychological theories, but have concentrated upon techniques for educating these students. In some instances, the specific model or ap- proach is derived directly from one school of thought, with strict inter- pretations of the philosophical base; others, however, are more eclectic in nature, and are broader in their educational application. The first de- tailed analyses of the various approaches and their theoretical bases were performed by Rhodes and Tracy (1972a, b), Of the models identified by Rhodes and his colleagues, those that have had the most impact on edu- cational service delivery have been the psyChoeducational and ecological approaches, and applied behavioral analysis.

The Psychoeducational Approach The psychoeducational approach is an eclectic combination of psychody-

103 4- -I- 1 Haring

namic theory and prescriptive education. Many of its concepts are com- mon to the child guidance movement, but it also includes direct educa- tional intervention. It evolved from within the mental health area as a pragmatic means for understanding behavior disorders. A number of ex- cellent child clinicians developed this approach, based not on research, but on many years of clinical experience. The most influential of these were William Morse, Fritz Redl, Dave Wine- man, and Ruth Newman. Morse and his colleagues were very active in conducting demonstration and professional training programs in the 1950s and early 1960s (e.g., Morse, 1953). Two main management strate- gies, Redl's Life Space Interview and Morse's Crisis Teacher, characterize the majcr work of this group. Many of Morse's students, among them Peter Knoblock, Peggy Wood, and Nicholas Long, continued the basic as- sumptions embraced by psychoeducation, adding their own variations and adaptations. The basic psychoeducational approach focuses on the cognitive and af- fectiv& domains and considers the existence of instincts, needs, and drives in disordered behavior. Through treatment, the individual gains insight into and control over his or her maladaptive behavior. The follow- ing diagram, adapted from Kauffman (1981, p. 199), illustrates how the process of the psychoeducational approach works to change maladaptive behavior. Instincts Cognitive and Intervention Insight Behavior Drives 0. Affective 41. --0. 0. Change Needs Problems The psychoeducational model is child centered, as it assumes that the nature of disordered behavior resides in an internal, unconscious state. In contrast, the ecological approach views the problem of emotional distur- bance as a result of the interaction among the child and the people and systems in his or her environment.

The Ecological Approach The ecological approach is based on the premise that disturbed children require change and intervention in many aspects of their environment home, school, and community. The most extensive application of ecolog- ical techniques has been in the work of Nicholas Hobbs and his program, Project Re-Ed. Project Re-Ed was a weekday residential program in which the teacher- counselors planned and implemented children's day and evening pro- grams and served as their counselors, recreation planners, and friends. Efforts were made to improve the children's environment by psychiatric social workers who worked with the children's family both during and

104 Perspectives on the Development of Educational Programs

after the children's treatment. A liaison teacher maintained contact with the children's school programs in their communities. The basic elements of the Re-Ed model focus on 1. Educational intervention stressing mental health rather than illness; 2. Teaching rather than treatment; 3. Learning and acquisition of skills rather than personality reorganization; 4. The present and the future rather than the past; and 5. Intervention in the child's total social system and not just educational or intrapsychic processes. (Hobbs, 1965)

Other goals included re-establishing disturbed children's trust in signifi- cant adults within their environment and helping children develop a sense of identification and belonging within their communities. Children were also helped to unlearn undesirable behaviors, to learn desirable ones, to set goals, and to gain cognitive control over problem areas.

Applied Behavior Analysis Of all the early behaviorists, Skinner, with his work in operant condition- ing, has had the greatest influence on education of the emotionally dis- turbed. He used the principles disdovered in his laboratory in practical life situations, and his writings have practical application to the class- room. In addition, many of his students, including Charles Ferster, Ogden Lindsley, and Sidney Bijou, have applied his work to behavioral inter vention with seriously emotionally disturbed children and adults. From the late 1950s on, the behavioral approach began to have a major impact on the management philosophy and procedures used in programs for the emotionally disturbed. Paul Fuller, while a graduate student at the University of Indiana, was among the first to apply operant conditioning to human behavior (1949). He demonstrated considerable behavior changes with a profoundly hand- icapped young adult. Ogden Lindsley was the first to develop a series of operant conditioning programs applied to human behavior. While on the staff at in the early 1950s, Lindsley studied the behav- ior of psychotics at Metropolitan State Hospital. Extensions of operant techniques in applied settings increased in the late 1950s and early 1960s. An example is the work of Ayllon, who, with Michael (1959), col- laborated in a study involving 19 psychotic patients whose behaviors, such as violent acts, psychotic talk, and hoarding, were modified through operant procedures. . In 1962, following a year's study with Skinner, Sidney Bijou established an experimental classroom at the Rainier School in Buckley, Washington. Mentally retarded school age children were given programmed instruc- tional material and were provided reinforcement for work completed cor-

105 Haring

rectly. At about the same time, Montrose Wolf designed a token system, and. Donald Baer applied those procedures to modify a number of behav- iors in natural settings. Ivar I.ovaas, a graduate of the University of Wash- ington, began a series of studies with autistic children at the University of California at Los Angeles.

During this same period, Gerald Patterson, at the University of Oregon, conducted studies with school children who were hyperactive in class- room settings (1965a). One of these studiesinvolved reinforcement of child's attending behavior with a light as a signal and the advance ot counter on the child's desk. The points on the counter were "cashed in" for pennies. In another study Patterson used social reinforcement (praise) with a seven-year-old child who was experiencing school phobia (1965b). Concomitant to these developments, other psychologists conducted simi- lar applied research with children possessing a variety of behavior disor- ders in natural settings, including classrooms.

Op'erant Conditioning in Special Classrooms

During the time that researchers were refining the methodology, special educators were extending. the application of systematic operant pro- cedures and reinforcement in a number of special and regular classrooms. These early attempts by special educators were lesS sophisticated than those of the psychologists, but the activities they used were more adapt- able to natural settings with children.- Probably the first application of reinforcement by a special educator in a systematically arranged class- room environment was conducted by the authorand Lakin Phillips. In this service-oriented application, two special classrooms in- Arlington County, Virginia were established for 15 emotionally disturbedchildren. One was a primary class (ages seven to nine), the other anintermediate class (ages 9 to 11). These classes provided a highly structured educa- tional setting in which each child was indiyidually programmed with specified work objectives for each day. Minutes of free time were sched- uled at certain times each day, depending on work completed correctly (Haring 8z Phillips, 1962; Phillips 8z Haring, 1959).

In 1960 the author was appointed Educational Director ofthe Children's Rehabilitation Unit at the, Medical Center and in- vited Ogden Lindsley to apply his knowledge of Operant conditioning and technical skill to education. In the process of arranging behavioral procedures for classroom instruction, Lindsley developed precision teaching, a technique based on the precise measurement of behavior, in- cluding pinpointing the behavior to be changed, counting and charting behaviors on the standard behavior chart, and making instructional deci- sions based on performance data.

Two other special educators who contributed to the developmentof be- havioral technology in special education were Richard Whelan and VanceHall. Richard Whelan began graduate studies in special education 114 106 perspectives on the Development of Educational Prograths

with the author at the University of Kansas in 1J62. Whelan had devel- oped a behaviorally oriented program for emotionally disturbed children while at the Southard School at the Menninger Foundation Clinic. He de- veloped and refined operant procedures to increase their use by teachers in regular and special classrooms. Hall made a substantial contribution to the classroom application of operant techniques. Sirice moving from the University of Washington to the University of Kansas in 1965, he has been teaching teachers to use reinforcement techniques to modify chil- dren's behaviors in regular classrooms settings. Another application of a behavjoral program for the emotionally dis- turbed was developed by Frank Hewett in 1968. His program, known as the Engineered Classroom, was initiated in the Santri Monica Public Schools and has been widely replicated. Hewett's work involved the de- velopmental sequencing of educational tasks necessary to lead the child from the first stage of the educative process (attentinn) to the final stage (mastery). By the 1970s the application of reinforcement prindiples had 'spread rap- idly throughout school programs for the emotionally disturbed. The pro- cedures, based on hundreds of case studies with school age children, be- came commonplace in the school, and many teachers skilled in applied behavioral analysis have clone meaningful classroom research.

Other Developments

While the procedures of applied behavior analysis dominate program- ming for the emotionally disturbed, alternative approaches are proving successful in the management of disordered behavior. Two schools of thought, social learning theory and cognitive behavior modification, are contributing to the knowledge and practice within the field. Both are de- rived from the larger learning theory model, but have also been influ- enced by the principles of . They have broadened the concept of behaviorism by emphasizing cognitive development and the role of cognition in oliert behavior. Each approach has associated with it a distinct set of intervention procedures, but both are founded in basic behavioral technology.

Cognitive Behavior Modification The cognitive behaviorists' approach to intervention involves their at- tempt to change overt behavior by altering thoughts, interpretations, as- sumptions, and strategies of responding (Kazdin, 1978). Cognitive behav- ior modification evolved from the operant conditioning model. However, those researchers and. practitioners who use cognitive processes to change behavior differ significantly from behaviorists. Cognitive beha-

107 115 Flaring

viorists emphasize the person's perception and interpretation of environ- immtal events, and are willing to employ internal, private, implicit, or covert events as intervention techniques. They do not limit intervention to the arrangement or rearrangeme'nt of the environment.

The great debates from the early development of learning- theory about what learning is, hoW learning occurs, and what role mediating variables play may be reduced to cognitive versus stimulus-response explanations of learning (Kazdin, 1978; Spence, 1950). The basic role of cognition in learning was first discussed by Tolman (1952), who maintained that the individual learns strategies of responding and perceives general relation- ships in the environment. Earlier, Thorndike (1935) had written that cog- nitive processes may facilitate learning but are not essential. Dissatisfac- tion with the strict operant model resulted in the development of intervention strategies that fall under the rubric of cognitive mediation.

Evidence that individuals can and do learn to control behavior as a result of this process is steadily increasing. Because overt behaviors are not al- ways the essential problem, the individual's thoughts,specifically self- concept and self-evaluations, as well as feelings and verbalizations may become the target for change. Changes in cognition, then, influence be- haviors. In human conditioning, researchers have noted that humans seem to form perceptions that complicate theexperimental results (Grings, 1965). In a variety of learning experiments researchers have noted that human subjects provide self-instructions that increase cogni- tive activity. There is little doubt about the importance of thought in many aspects of behavioral research.

Cognitive processes have been used in behavior modification for some time. Wolpe (1958) refers to "thought-stopping," which has been used in behavior therapy. In that intervention the therapist shouts "Stop!" to in- terrupt the subject's obsessing. The subject repeats "Stop!"..to him- orher- self to control thoughts.

Lloyd Homme discussed another applimtion of cognitive behaviorism in "Control of Coverants: The Operants of the Mind" (1965). Fomme coined the term 'coverant" by combining "covert" with "operant." Coverants are private eventsthoughts, images, reflections, and fantasies. According to Homme, controlling coverants need not be impairedby overt responses or consequences. Individuals know best whenthey experience private events (coverants) that have been selected for change andthey can apply consequences. Accordingly, in order to change an overt or covertbehav- ior, individuals select a behavior such as smoking, determine the behav- ior objective, and provide the reinforcing consequence when the target consequence is reached. Other techniques havebeen developed by psy- chologists including Mahoney (1974), Meichenbaum (1977), and Mischel (1973), and Include rational-emotive therapy, self-instruction training, cognitive therapy, problem-solving, and self-control.

1 6 108 Perspectives on the Development of Educational Programs

,Self-ContrOl Techniques The development of procedures to enhance self-control are of particular interest to educators. In these procedvres stimulus control techniques are used to modify a behavior that the client wishes to change or that is so- cially inappropriate or not controlled by a narrow range of stimuli (e.g., Overeating). Behavior is systematically associated with stimuli until it comes under the control of the stimuli. Self-control may be enhanced by self-observation and the self-recording of data on the behavior to be changed. Self-observation is often successfully supported by self-reinforcement and self-punishment. The individual determines the responses to be rein- forced and can reinforce him- or herself at any time. Clients are taught the basic principles of operant conditioning,.and an external agent may ini- tially implement the contingencies. Self-reinforcement has been used successfully in elementary classrooms to improve attention and studying and to reduce disruptive behavior (Kazdin. 1975). Self-control may also involve alternate response training, such as replacing anxiety with relax- ation, Opinions vary concerning the effect of external forces on self-control op- erations, and the design of most self-control studies prevents total exclus. sion of external forces. Also, individuals often reinforce their own behav- ior leniently or noncontingently, and some researchers have introduced external reinforcement to encourage strict self-reinforcement. Self-con- trol techniques have been carried out primarily 6n adult outpatients. However, studies have been conducted with children and adolescents and the procedures have the potential for becoming a major intervention strategy.

Social Learning Theory As noted earlier, the conceptual rationale for the social learning model draws heavily on research in behavioral and cognitive psychology. The basis of this theory relates environmental and cognitive events to behav- ior. The bulk of the theoretical and applied research in this area has been conducted by Bandura (1909, 1977), who has developed a comprehensive theory that, although derived from behavioral principles, considers cog- nitive variehles. Bandura's research focuses on the role of cognitive pro-, cesses in observational (vicarious) learning. According to Bandyra, an in- dividual can learn to respond correctly by watching another person perform the task; thus, he has given considerable attention to the impor- tance of imitation in learning. The instructional strategy of imitation has been widely applied to handicapped individuals in the classrooms. "The social learning theorists have a pragmatic, functional view of social development. They define a socially well-adjusted child or adult as pne who interacts with the environment in a way the produces satisfying and

109 1 1 r- Haring

rewarding consequences and minimizes the occurPence of aversive or punishing events. The optimal balance between the negative and positive interactions will vary according to the characteristics of a given person and the characteristics and limitations of a given environment. Therefore, the "optimal" behavior of different people will vary, both within and across settings. Social learning theorists believe that people's experiences in interacting with their environment.affect their behavior. They reject the conceptual framework of "stages" desci:bed by developmental psychologists which focuses on hierarchical development of behavior. In the social learning paradigm, the appropriateness of behavior is evaluated,through either the person's self-evaluation of a given behavior or a value judgment of other persons in the position of power; the emphasis of intervention is to change behavior so it will be more adaptive and so that others in the envi- ronment will reinforce it. Thus, social interactions are directed more po- sitively and the natural opportunities for reinforcement are increased. Wood, Spence, and Rutherford (1982) have provided seven principles from social learning theory which can be used to guide the implementa- tion of educationtil prograias for the emotionally disturbect The authors 'summarized the following principles from a comprehensive review of so- cial learning theory:

1. Behaviorpccurs in a coininuously interactive system;

2. Cognitive and affective factors are hypothesized to phy an important role in human behavior, but observable actions remain our primary data;

:3. For purposes of analysis and planning, it is useful to speak of fundamental "behavior contingency units";

4. Much social behavior is learned by observing the behavior of real or sym- bolic models;

5. A key instructional tool for social learning interventions is the restructur- ing of the special program environment to elicit and reinforce the social behavior the teacher wishes the student to learn and use;

6. The goal of social learning interventions is to have students learn, produce .and practice approved behavior at all times;

7. Generalization of approved behavior is planned (pp. 240-24a). Both social learning theory and cognitive behavior modification are im- portant extensions of applied behavioral analysis and represent promis- ing new interventions for emotionally disturbed children.

110 Perspectives on the Development of Educational Programs

Conclusions

An historical review shows tremendous changes and variation in educa- tional strategies and programs for the emotionally disturbed. Educational services in the public and private educational establishments have be- come more effective and more comprehensive. As a service discipline, special education has asgurned the major responsibility for educating the emotionally disturbed and an increasing number of these children and youth are receiving appropriate educational services.

Educators have become a great deal more objective and knowledgeable about the causes of behavior disorders. In particular, behavioral technol- ogy has significantly advanced our effectiveness in behavioral inter\ In- tion. Using applied behavior analysis procedures, we can pinpoint the specific event associated with the adaptive or maladaptive behavior, and we can plan powerful and appropriate intervention strategies. Behavior analysis has focused intervention on present events that have been shown to be directly'fated to behavior; it has resulted in abandonment of the traditional focus on intrapsychic causes or the etiology of behavior disorders. Applying behavio,l strategies has increased our skills in es- tablishing systematic procedures such as record keeping and perfor- mance data collection and analysis. Most recently, data analysis pro- cedureshave enabledustomake more effectivedecisions on interventions.

An improved technology for program evaluation coupled with increased skills in applying these techniques and the emergence of behavioral change as the major criterion of program effectiveness enable us to deter- mine more effective models and programs. It is hoped that we will soon be able to improve treatment by matching intervention strategies and models to specified conditions and types of disdrders. Also, our in- creased precision in describing intervention procedur,es will enable us to replicate various treatment modefs.

Special educators are now among the most skillful applicators of behav- ioral research results in natural settings. We have made significant prog- ress as we have shifted the basis of our educational programming from "intra-psychic disease" conceptualizations to basic i.esearch in learning theory. While our greatest gains have been made through the systematic applica- tion of behavioral principles and procedures in school settings, many ed- ucators now are beginning to doubt that a strict behavioral approach is sufficient in designing academic and social interventions. We are seeing evidence that developments in cognitive behavior modification offer a more comprehensive approach to behavior management. Such an ap- proach is consistent with the great amount of evidence that children's behavior is affected by their observation of the behavior of others.

11 5 Haring

Within this same framework, social learning theory has emerged as a cluster of conceptualizations that are attractive to educators because so- cial interactions are a major source of both reinforcement and punish- ment for children. Educators see a theoretical model that can presumably acicount for social influence as extremely useful as they work with chil- dren in social situations. Despite interruptions from nonscientific fads and fancies; the overall progress of education during the past 50 years, and especially since 1060, has been tremendous.

Reference List

Ay Hon, T., & M iliulJ The psychiatric nurse asa behavior engineer. lournal ot the Experi- nientol Anolysisof Behaviory1959,-.323-334.

Bandma, A. Principles of behavior modification. New York:Rinehart and Winston,1969.

ndura. A.Social learning theory. EnglewoodCliffs, NJ: PrentWe-lhill,Inc1977.

Berkowitz, & Rothnhin, E.1'. (Eds.). Public education for disturbed childrmi in New York City. Springfield, IL: Charles C.Thomas,Publisher, 1967.

Birnbmun,P. (Ed.). A treasure of ludaism. New York: IlithrewPublishing, 1962.

Bokoven, LS. Moral treatnwnt in American psychiatry. Journal of Nervous and Nhintal Dis- ease. 1956. 124, 167-194, 292-321.

Brigham. A. Schools in lunatic asylums. Anwrican Journal ofInsanity, 1845, 1, 326-340.

Brigham, A. Tlw moral treatment of insanity. American Journal ofInsanity, 1847. 4, 1-15.

Brigham,A. Schools and asylums for the idiotic and imbecile. Anwrican Journal of Insanity, 1848, 5, 19-33.

Fuller. P.R.Operant conditioning of a vegMative human organism American Journal of Psy- chology,1949, 62, 587-590.

Grings, W. X. Verbal-perceptualfactors in the conditioning of au tomon ic responses. In W.F. Prokasy 011,Classical conditioning: A symposium. New York: Appleton-Cent ury4:rofts, 131(15. flaring, NC., & Phillips,Ed- Educating emotionally disturbedCh ild run.New York: McGraw- Hill. Inc ,1962.

!farms, E. Origins of modernpsychiatry. Springfield, IL; Charles C. Thomas, Publisher, 1967.

leWett, .M. he emotionally disturbed childin thechissroom. I3oston:Allyn andBacon, Inc., 1988.

Hobbs, N.How the Re-ED plan developed. In N.J. Lon.g, W.C.Morse, & R.G. Newman (1.'.d.), Conflict in the classroom. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth,Inc., 1965. llomme, L. Perspectives in psychology: XXIV. Control of coverants, theoperards of Ow mind. Psychologi(al Record, 1965, 15, 51)1-511.

Howe, S.C. On training and iiducatingidiots: Tlw second annual report to the legislature of Nlassachusetts. American Journal of Insanity,1851, 8, 97-118.

112 Perspectives on the Development of Educational Programs

Kaestle, C.F. (Ed.). Joseph Lancaster and the monitorial school movement: A documentary history. New York:Teachers College Press, 1973.

Kanner, L. Autistic disturbances of affective contact. Nervous Child, 1943, 2, 217-250..

Kanner, L. Child psychiatry, Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas, Publisher, 1935,1957.

Kauffman, J.M. Nineteenth century views of children's behavior disorders: Historical contri- butions and continuing issues. Journal of Special Education, 1976, 10, 335-349.

Kauffman, J.M. Characteristics of children's behavior disorders (Second edition). Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill Publishing Company, 1981.

Kazdin, A.E. Behavior modification in applied settings. Homewood, IL: Dorsey, 1975.

Kazdin, A.E. listor,,of behavior modification: Experimental foundations of contemporary re- search. Baltimore: University Park Press, 1978.

Lancaster, J. Improvements in education, as it respects the industrious classes of the commu- nity, containing, among other important particulars, an account of the institution for the education of one thousand poor children, Borough Rood, Southwark: and of the the new system of education an which it is conducted (3rd ed.). London: Darien & Harvey, 1805.

Lewis, C.D. Introduction: landmarks. In J.M. Kauffman & C.D. Lewis (Eds.), Teaching children with behavior disorders: Personal perspectives. Columbus, OH: Charles E. Merrill Publish- ing Company, 1974.

Mahoney. M.J. Cognition und behavior. modification. Cambridge, MA: I3allinger Publishing Company, 1979.

Meichenbaum, D.M. Cognitive behavior modification. New York: Plenum Press, 1977,

Mischel, W. Toward a cognitive social learning reconceptualization of personality. Psycholog- ical Review, 1973, 80, 252-283.

Morse. W.C. The development of a mental hygiene milieu in a camp program for disturbed boys. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 1953, 23, 826-833.

Patterson, G.R. An application of conditioning techniques to the control of a hyperactive child. In L.P. lJlIrnann & L. Krasner (Eds.). Case Studies in Behavior Mothfication. New York: Halt, Rinehart & Winston, 1965a.

Patterson, G.B. A learning theory approach to the treatnmnt of the school phnbic child. In L.P. Ullmann & L. Krasner (Eds.), Case studies in behavior modification. New York: !fait, Ri- nehart & Winston, 1965b.

Phillips, E.L.. & Haring, N.G. Results from special techniques for teadfing emotionally dis- turbed children. Exceptional Children, 1959, 26, 64-67.

Ray, I. Observations of th principle (sic) hospitals far the insane, in Great Britain, France, and Germany. American Journal of Insanity, 1846. 2, 289-390,

Rhodes, MC., & Tracy, Md.. (Eds.). A study of child variance, Vol, 1:Theories. Ann Arbor:The University of Michigan Press, 197?, (a)

Rhodes, W.C., & Tracy, M.L. (Eds.), A study of child variance, Vol. 2: Interventions, Ann Ar- bor: The University of Michigan Press, 1972. (b)

Rubenstein: E,A, Childhood mental diseases in America, American Journal of Orthopsychia- try, 19413, 18, 314-321,

Salmon, D, Joseph Lancaster. London: Longmans, Green, 1904.

113 121 Sequin. E. Idiocy and its ft:mai:lent by the physiological method. New York: Brandon. 1866.

Skinner. BY. Two types of conditioned refMx: A reply to knorski and Mil Mr. ma ct Gen-. vral Psyrholoo. 1937. 16. 272-279.

Spence. K.W. Cc,gnitive vvrsus stimulus-responXv theories of learning..Psychologiccd 1950..57. 159.172.

Thnrnclike. E.L. The psvhology of wants, interests, and attitudes. New York: Appleton-Gen- tury-Ginfts. 1935.

Tolman. E.G. A cognitive motivat,oual mndel. Psychological liet*w, 1952, 59. 389-400.

Ulman. I.D.. and Klein. 1.1., Communication. Journal of Applied Behavior A'nalysis, 1975. 8, 210.

Watson:LB. PsychnIngy as the behaviorist views it. Psychological Review. 1913.20.158-177. tValpe.L Psychotherapy by reciprocal inhthition. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1958.

Wood. HI.. ,13pence, J.. & Rutherford. R.B. An intervention program fnr emotionally.disturhed students based on social learning principles. iR. L. McDowell, G. W. Adamsnn. & FAL Wood (Eds.), Teaching emotionally disturbed children, I3nston: Little; l3rnwn & Cninpany, 1482.

114 ,

Cooperative Full Service Delivery to Emotionally Disturbed Students

Frank H. WOod

Considerations for Planning Classes for the Emotionally Handicapped is the title of a small booklet authored by Hollister and Goldston, which the Council for Exceptional Chikfren published in1962.The authors' pur- pose, as stated in their preface, focused on the need "to identify the es- sential psychoeducational' processes" (p. i) operating in classes for this group of special needs students "to pa:quote better communication be- tween programs and more rigorous efforts at program description" (p. i). In the booklet, they outlined desirable features of68prefgrams they stud- ied. Their recommendations may bp taken as an indickon of what was considered desirable practice almosl 20 years ago, at a time when,public school programming for emOtionally disturbed students hEti been stimu- lated by mandatory legislation passed in several states. It is instructive to look at some of the desirable program characteristics Hollister and Goldston (1962) list in the sections entitled, "The Clinician- Educator LiaisonProcess" and "School-Home Liaison Process." Men- tioned among desirable characteristicof clinician-educator relation- -ships are: "consultations between educators and clinicians on specific problems, teacher observation reports tti clinicians, periodic review of case dynamics by clinicians with teachers, use of mental health and edu- cational consultants in work with teachers, and use of therapeutic sup- ports for teachers" 23). Among desirable characteristics of the school- home liaison process are: "periodic interviews and interpretations of the pupil's progress, parent training and education, parent counseling, and casework approach to hQme" (p..24).

4'1 Wood

All of these' would be considered desirable characteristics of a compre- hensive service delivery, system today. How much progress has been made over the years in implementing these ideas? Undoubtedly, some school programs for emotionally disturbed students are linked to well-developed supportive service systems. A national sur- vey published in 1977 (Challenges for Children's Mental Health Services) showed that areas remain where present accomplishments fall well be- low what experts consider desirable. The 10 services most oftert,men-, tioned as'needing tobe improved, developed, or implemented were to:

1. Train and counsel parents to foster healthy mental development in chil- dren.

2. Provide early detection and referral for appropriate intervention. 3. Educate all children in life management skills.

4. Base training of educators on developmental and humanistic approaches.

5. Strengthen and lupport families.

6. Provide comprehensive health care.

7. Improve service coordination and accessibility.

8. Provide community-based outpatient treatment. 9. Train teachers about the needs of handiCapped children. 10.Provide community-based regidential treatment in non-hospital settings. (pp. xii-xiii) All of those listed are related to the provision of educational as well as mental health services to emotionally disturbed children and youth who do not need residential treatment, or to the prevention of serious emo- tional disturbance in this group. The importance of interagency coordina- tion is mentioned frequently in the elaborations of these basic needs statements. The concerns listed in the 1977 survey are very similar to those in the 1962 booklet. Cooperation among.professionals and agencies, then and now, is seen as highly desirable but difficult to realize, much talked about but seldom observed. While the 1977 statements are not well developed as a model, they can be used to structure our intentions for the devehl- ment of service delivery systems.

,Some Assumptions - The procedure followed by many special educators in planning and pro- viding instruction to special needs students is accurately described in terms of a disease or disability model, the, conceptualization of educa- tional service delivery based by simplified analogy on allopathic medical

116 "24

A

Full Service Delivery to Emotionally Disturbed Students

practice. This disability model rests on the assumption that the problem to be treated is lodged in the student, a result of a physiological or charac- terological defect or weakness, or of faulty past learning. Special educa- tors guided by this model make use of standardized a'ssessment pro- cedures, and once the problem has been identified and labeled, they implement intervention procedures prescribed for such a problem. In fact, many of the treatments for disturbed or disturbing behavior typically characterized by this model are administered by physicians or mental health specialists who treat the special student through medication or psychotherapy in isolation from the classroom. Teachers are only periph- erally involved in the treatment process. Indeed, educators are frequently viewed as naive about the causes and appropriate treatment of emotional disturbance in children, and therefore, as prone to adopt superficial treat- ment methodologies that may obscure the true nature of the child's prob- lem and interfere with more appropriate treatment. "Schools have been quick to accept the ahistorical, easily administered, symptom- eliminat- ing techniques that promise to help control behaviorally difficult stu- dents," Silverman (1979, p. 63) wrote recently in criticizing educational practice viewed from this perspective.

The approach to developing a service delivery system based on inter- professional and interagency collaboration proposed in this paper is based on the assumption that the disease or disability model of problem behavior and its treatment is too narrow. Certainly, some disturbed be- havior does seem to be focused in characteristics of the individual stu- dent and may be most efficiently treated by noneducational interven- tions. But, the great majority of school behavior problems are better conceptualized as the result of interactions between the personal charac- teristics of the individual and the characteristics of his or her environ- ment, as both are influenced by the ongoing behavior of that individual and others, a concept that has been expressed by Bandura (1977)" as a three-way interaction. Furthermore, it is assumed here that the kind of interventions Silverman (1979) characterizes as "ahistorical, easily administered, symptom-elimi- nating techniques" have as important a place in the overall plan of inter- vention for some students as medication or psychotherapeutic counsel- ing have for others. The goal of the service delivery system proposed is to coordinate the therapeutic efforts of groups of people without rejecting their potential contributions to behavior change based on their preferred intervention procedures. The model that best fits the service delivery system described in this pa- per is one which has been called "ecological." Apter (Note 1) lists the following principles as characteristics of an ecological view of disturbed student behavior: 1. Each child is an inseparable part of a small social system.

. Disturbance is not viewed as a disease located within the body of the child, but rather as discordance (a lack of balance) in the system ....

117 1 25 Wood

3. The goal of any intervention is to make the system work; and to make it work ultimately, without the intervention .... 4. This broader view of disturbance gives rise to three major areas for inter- vention: a) changing the child, b) changing the environment, c) changing attitudes and expectations. (p. 5) Intervention, when thus conceptualized, is indeed a complex, multi- faceted process. This complexity, rather than a lack of commitment, is the 'reason why the desirable events listed by Hollister and Goldston (1962) have not yet been realized in practice. By accepting this complexity as a given, however, we may be able to make more adequate prpgress in bring- ing these desired events to realization during the next 20 years.

Schools and Other Social Systems

Apter (Note 1) refers to the child as part of a "small socialsystem." John- son (1970) has described schools as social systemsin which there is "a recurrent pattern of events, differentiated from but depending onthe larger environment" (p. 20). These events "involve the flow of energy from the environment through (he system itself .and back into the envi- ronment. While the energy is within the system it is transformed"by the people and the physical environment of which the system is composed (pp. 20-21). The school as a social system is what Johnson calls a "social organization." Social organizations are differentiated from other kinds of social systems by the following features: 1. The group maintains itself by recruiting and training personnel. The group functions performed by persons filling roles within the organi- zation are well specified.

3. The organization posesses a clearly defined hierarchy of authority. 4. Adaptive structures provide information about the adequacy of organiza- tional functioning and the changing character of the external environment.

5. Common norms and values bupress the authority structure of the organiza- tion. Behaviors that define school roles like "teacher" and "student" are strongly reinforced within the organizational structure of the school. Deviant behaviors, which define "disturbed student," forexample, are punished. Furthermore, other role behaviors are equally strongly rein- forced or punished within the other social organizations with which we are concerned, such as the family,the juvenile court system, the mental health system, and the welfare system. Keeping these basic organizational concepts in mind willhelp as we de- fine the problems that arise when special educators propose a compre- hensive, coordinated mental health service delivery system for dealing

1 2'6 118 Full Service Delivery to Emotionally Disturbed Students

with disturbed students. Johnson's listing of characteristics of the organi- zation makes it clear that more is involved than the willingness of indi- viduals to collaborate in service delivery. Their collaboration will be made difficult, if not impossible, if it is not supported by their member organizations. The special or regular class teacher who wishes to consult with a local mental health clinic regarding a student's problem behavior will find it hard to proceed in the face of school policies that forbid the initiation of such referrals by teachers (formal organizational structure in- terference), or the opposition of a building principal ,who expresses strong personal opposition to involving "outsiders" in school affairs (in- formal organizational structure). One parental partner will find it hard to cooperate with the school when dhe other opposes such' cooperation. Sometimes agency personnel are bound by organizational rules'denying services to children whose parents will not participate in concurrent group therapy. Comprehensive service delivery requires intelligent planning for dealing with a complex group of organizations, each with its own rules for its members, its own environmental constraints, and its own rules for the interactions of its members with the larger environment. Our task is be- ginning to become clear: How do we facilitate role and, rule changes within these organizations to make possible the collaboration that a com- prehensive service delivery system requires?

Factors Supporting Service Delivery Change

The major reason for the failure of past efforts to implement service deliv- ery system changes has been an underestimation of the size of the task. Planning has stressed the deSirability of change, but implementation has been hopelessly weak in resources. Figure 1 suggests some important re- sources for producing and maintaining changes in service delivery; these resources are grouped as antecedents or reinforcers of change. Note that most of the antecedents could alternatively be conceptualized as negative reinforcers for change. Legislation can mandate changes in service. Recent examples of mandat- ing legislation affecting the delivery of services to emotionally disturbed students are Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of1973(PL 93-156) and the Education for All Handicapped Children Act of1975 (PL 94-142). Court decisions can also produce changes, but their impact may be weaker because courts do not share the legislative power to authorize supporting resources. Community advocacy groups can be effective an- tecedents for change, in part because of their recent history of success in obtaining court or legislative support when their initial demands have not been met by service agencies. Administrative proposals ranging from the development of organizational plans to actual skill training are less powerful factors in the change process now than in the past because ad- ANTECEDENTS REINFORCERS Strong Strong Legislation Increased funding Additional personnel Court decisions COMPREHENSIVE Additional training Community advocacy SERVICE Community approval Administrative plans DELIVERY Organizational approval Individual plans Individual approval

Weak Weak

Figure 1: Factors Supporting Comprehensive Service Delivery Full Service Delivery to Emotionally Disturbed Students

ministrative initiative has been weakened by legislation and regulation, and agreements witlpemployee organizations. Proposals made by indi- vidual members of organizations are the weakest of all. Financial support, because it is a common denominator for all resources, is the most powerful reinforcement for changes in service delivery sys- tems. Assignment of personnel to collaborative efforts usually, but not always, requires additional financial support. Community approval can be effective as a reinforcement for change if it carries with it the promise of additional financial support as needed, or if it poses the threat of ag- gressive advocacy for change. Organizational approval can sustain behav- ior for a considerable time, even in the absence of stronger reinforcement, but the support of only a few members will prove inadequate to sustain change for more than a short time, except from the few extraordinarily committed individuals. After considering the contingencies that support or discourage a broad, cooperative response to emotional disturbance in school, the concerned educator, parent, or citizen is ready to tackle the task of increasing coop- eration. There are very few situations in which service delivery cannot be improved by the implementation of even modest collaborative programs, so long as they are .well designed. We do not have to involve everyone to make a difference. From the perspective of the ecological model, im- provement anywhere benefits the whole system.

Legislation and Court Decisions

Following a series of court decisions that established the right of handi- capped children to a free public Aducation, the Education for All Handi- capped Children Act of1975and the regulations implementing it have prescribed the form An appropriate education for these studenis should take. This legislation supports comprehensive programming efforts at several levels in states that accept the related funding. Local school dis- tricts are required to develop plans for programming for all special stu- dents and individualized dducation programs (IEPs). State education agencies are required to prepare plans for implementing educational ser- vices for all students in the state. There has been considerable discussion about the impact of this legisla- tion on educational programming for emotionally disturbed students. The definition of emotional disturbance in the implementing regulations seems to limit the application of the law to only the most seriously emo- tionally disturbed, a group from which the "socially maladjusted but not emotionally disturbed" are specifically excluded. Does this mean that no services are mandated for the mildly or moderately emotionally dis- turbed student? Raiser and Van Nagel (1980) fear that this will be the case, and Knrffman (1980) argues strongly that PL94-142will have the effect of punishing schools that provide special services to the mildly and moderately disturbed.

1 21 125 Wood

While the full effects of the legislation are not yet clear, partly because the implications of some provisions are still being debated in the courts, a case can be made that the general effects will be positivefor moderately as well as seriously emotionally disturbed students. For onething, it is' clear that the public schools have an obligation to provide an educational program for all children, and teachers cannot look to exclusion as asolu- tion to the' problems of managing certain students in their classes. This is leading teachers to adic for assistance from administrators, and adminis- trators in turn to seek help from outside the system. In addition, many of the students receiving special education support services on a part-time basis under, categorical labels like "learning disabled" have behavior problems as a secondary characteristic. Regular clitssroom teachers are eager to receive practical help from special educators or mental health specialists.

It is also worthy of note that the Office of Special Education and Rehabili- tative Services estimates that large numbers of emotionally disturb&I stu- dents are currently going unserved and is pushing states to see that these students are located and served (Grosenick & Huntze, 1979). The result may be the writing of more IEPs in wilich social behavior is the focus of the planned interventions. Regulations require that parents be present at the IEP conference and formally approve the resulting program for their child. Like the federal, state, and local plans, the IEP i's an administrative plan or agreement committing several people to collaborative efforts to change the school, and perhaps, other environments to improve adjust- ''ment by individual students. Of course, at the present time, too many IEP conferences seem to be perfunctory meetings. Goldstein, Strickland, Turnbull, and Curry (1980) reported that the IEP conferences they ob- served usually involved teachers explaining an already developed IEP to parents. Thus, although the IEP is sanctioned by the school system, it is typically an agreement of relatively narrow scope agreed to by a small number of people. The IEP's Potential for becoming a more comprehen7 sive statement coordinating service delivery is being delayed by the de- bate over the issue of who is responsible for funding any related physical or mental health 'services, noneducational in nature,that are mentioned as part of a student's educational program. Some governmental agencies have argued that it is the responsibility of the local school system to pay for these necessary related services. Others point out that the schools lack the financial resources to meet such an obligation. The issue is still being litigated and, jn the meantime, school administrators are being very cau- tious about the content of the IEPs being written. As emotional distur- bance is often generalized across several situations, both in and out of the school, an IEP drawing on resources outside of the school would be very desirable. For the present, however, the school remains the only system obligated by law to provide free services to emotionally disturbed chil- dren and youth. Not only do the regulations implementing PL 94-142 fail to make clear guarantees of services to the more moderately disturbed, but the law's influence has been weakened by what local education agencies generally jtj 122 Full Service Delivery to Emotionally Disturbed Students

perceive to .be inadequate supporting funding. The funding authoriza- tions were riever intended to provide more than partial support for the mandated special services, with the remainder to come,from state and local sources. Thus, each additional student served costs local taxpayers an additional arpount. IEPs tend to be weak because they are severely limited in scope. Still, as has been said, these administrative plans provide a model for planning comprehensive service delivery, however limited and flawed its imple- mentation. Those concerned about improving services to the seriously as well as the moderately emotionally disturbed should seek to extend the benefits of this kind of planning to more students through revision of the current eligibility definition and support for judicial and administrative rulings that extend present services.

Interagency Agreements Outside the Framework of PL. 94-142

Most interagency agreements that establish collaborative plans for service delivery to the emotionally disturbed are focused on the needs of seri- ously emotionally disturbed students. Here again, however, promising models exist that may be extended in the,future. Pittenger (1979) has de- scribed the agreement that links the services provided to delinquent youth in Pennsylvania by the State Department of Welfare and Education. Implementation of this agreement was supported by the assignment of a staff member of the Department of Education to a liaison role. The plan is described as a major step toward coordinated service delivery. Kirkbride and Rohleder (1978) 'describe a joint agreement among 10 school districts establishing a Kentucky Re-Ed program. An agreement was also reached between the Re-Ed program and a "regional mental health center to provide a variety of direct and coli6ultative services to the program. In tl3is case, the educational agency was the host for the pro- gram and a mental health clinic liaison was assigned to coordinate any needed clinic services. The following quotation gives an idea of the kinds Of service that c&ii be provided through this kind of cooperative agree- ment: -, Consultation was provided in the form of case consultation, referral services, and program consultation. Case consultation was given on a regular basis. Rec- ommendations were often made as it related to children possibly in need of medication evaluations, neurological evaluations, formal psychiatric evalua- tions of different types of inrventions in working with the child and his fam- ily. Such specific types of services were made available through specific mental health centers as need dictated. Consultation services also intiluded interpreta- tions of reports sent to Re-Ed from other mental health agencieS or agents. Refer- ral services to other care-giving agencies based on the child's needs was another facet of consultation services. At the time of admissions, referral to another ser- vice may have been indicated when Re-Ed was not the alternative which would

123 1 3 i Wood

best meet the needs of the child and family. Program consultation was supplied by a variety of professionals from within the Mental Health Center system. Con- sultation was given by Medical Records technicians, legal 'representative, branches of fiscal management and program management and development. Pri- mary in program consultation-for River Region (Mental Health Center) was that of interpre,ter to Re-Ed. River Region aided in the interpretation of the myriad of federal, state and local mental health policies, guidelines, and standards. It also aided in the establishment of internal guidelines and policies. Direct services have taken a variety of forms such as professionals working with the child, assistance in providing further diagnostics and in work:ng with the family in accepting Re-Ed as an alternative service plan for them and their child. River Region professionals were involved in more traditional ty ,es of treatment with parents while a child was at Re-Ed. In this situation the Fiver Region per- sonnel and the Re-Ed personnel worked closely in coordinating efforts for the family. The child, while in residency at Re-Ed, may also have been seen at a River Region Center for individual, family or more traditional group therapy. At 4 the time of termination from the Re-Ed program, referrals were often made to River Region's Children's Programs and/or other children's sbrvices in the child's area- of residency for continued services. (p. 128-129)

While the focus again is on the students enrolled in a special school, and thus probably considered seriously rather than moderately emotionally disturbed, this Kentucky program gives an encouraging example of what can be &Me when well-thought-out administrative plans are backed by ,the commitment of funds and personnel. "Turf problems" are often mentioned when such interagency cooperation is discussed. Sheare and Larson(1978)have shared their analysis of how friction and misunderstanding were minimized in a joint mental health- public school program for emotionally disturbed students and their fami- lies. They advocateiacing such issues squarely at the beginning. Program ownership, if not clearly delineated, invariably leads to power strug- gles between agencies and results in disjointed staff relationships. Initial plan- ning efforts were aimed at establishing program ownership:and control issues, with the realization that the failure to do so would result in hidden agendas and

program failure. (p, 543) . r- The key to successful cooperation, accordingdo Sheare and Larson? is a stress on the idea that agency contributions are distinct, but of equal value. Both agencies provided direct as well as assessment services, rather than one providing assessment services alone, leaving implemen- tation of interventions to the other. In this case, the program actually has cmadministrators, one from the mental health agency and one from the school. Sheare and Larson report that this system, while it sounds cum- bersome, works well in practice. Another type of interagency agreement lead..ng to cooperation in address- ing the problem of emotional disturbance in schools in a broader context than in the classroom has a more negative tone, but is reported by various administrators to have a beneficial effect. This type of agreement involves school-juvenile court cooperation around issues like truancy, probation, 32 124 Full Service Delivery to Emotionally Disturbed Students

and child abuse. The first two produce interagency cooperation focused on the student; the third focuses on the parents. Such agreements, what- ever their intent, are typically perceived by students and parents as coer- cive rather than supportive, but their results may be positive if the im- plicit sanction of incarceration or monetary fine is not imposed and resources supportive to the student, parent, and school can be obtained. The fact that many school administrators turn to such procedures sup- ports the observation that school personnel seeking to develop inteica- gency agreements may feel obliged to turn to unpreferred options because of a lack of resources to support other possibilities. In this case, as. w.ith the regulations of FL' 94-142, desirable professional practices occur only when they are mandated.

a Coordination of School Services

Roles Schools as organizations do not have a history of staff collal;oration. Tyy- ically, Personnel function independently, woTking in their own assigned spaces and passing students back and forth fur instruction or other kinds of intervention. The number of roles in providing direct or indirect ser- vice to students with special needs may be extensive. The following list of persons serving on educational plan committees charged with respon- sibility for determining a child's eligibility for special education place- ment or services reported by Gilliam(1979,p. 467) is illustrative. They have been listed here in order of actual importance in the meeting as rated by the participants themselves:

1. Special education teacher.

2.Special education consultant

3.Psychologist 4. Special education supervisor

5. Special education director

6. Guidance counselor

7. Regular education teacher

8.Others

9.Parent

10.Social worker

1.1. Other administrators 12.Principal (p. 467) Gilliam interprets this ranked list as indicating that high ranking may be associated with greater contact with the child and the child's family and

125 Wood

with possession of more data to contribute at the meeting. A major task of the school is to coordinate the activities of personnel filling these roles so that collaboration means more than participation in a joint planning meeting. Fuller participation can be promoted in a variety of ways.

Building Disciplinary Policies Building principals oan play an important role in initiating joint staff and parent planning, which can lead to the adoption of school-widediscipli- nary policies. While such policies may not removethe causes of emo- tional disturbance in classrooms, they can provide teachers, students, and parents with clear guidelines about how problem behavior will be managed. Lacking such guidelines, many schools reveal haphazard, inef- ficient, and inconsistent behavior management. The establishment of gtfidelines should be followed by staff training and parent information meetings as necessary. Of course, the administrator who begins thedevel- opment of such policies should not expect that a clear consensuswill emerge from group discussions. Therefore, he or sheshould be prepared in advance to assume leadership in establishing the policiesthat are viewed as sound and appropriate and as having substantial support. Such policies will gradually attract the support of all but a few"die-hards." Libbey (1980) found that a variety of disciplinary styles existed among the teachers she surveyed. She also reported that only those in the group who were in transitiorMat is tu say, seeking a different style of disci- pline, seemed dissatisfied with their current style. Those who had a firm position, regardless of what it might be, felt comfortable with what they were doing. Informal observation suggested that moststudents were able to accommodate to the different styles withoutobvipus stress. The fact that teachers do differ in their personal styles for behavior management, despite the existence of a general building policyfor discipline, is an- other factor that the thoughtful administrator will take into consideration when dealing with problems of disturbed student behavior.Students who have difficulty adjusting to certain disciplinary styles may be much more at home with some teachers than others.For such students, the right match with a teacher may be the difference between an achieving role as a well-adjusted student and that of a school troublemaker. Here again, the building administrator can achieve better service delivery by serving in a linking role to coordinate the efforts of the school staff.

Consulting Resource Teachers Many schools now have staff persons who are called "resource teachers." Despite the role name, which suggests active support to the regularclass- room teacher, most resource teachers seem tofunction in isolation, seeing small groups or individual students for short periods of time during the school day and communicating with regular class teachers occasionally at conferences or through written messages. Evans (1980)reported that

126 1 3 i4-* (7,5

Full Service Delivery to Emotionally Disturbed Students

her sample of resource teachers spent less than 5% of their time in con- sultation with regular class teachers, although a survey of the resource teachers, regular class teachers, and building principals revealed that the time spent should be at least twice that amount. Others (McKenzie, 1972; Newcomer, 1977) have advocated redefinition of the resource teacher role to emphasize the consultation function. They and others (Haring, 1977) have reported on the usefulness of such consulting resource teach- ers. The problem preventing the achievement of broader implementation of this idea can be described in terms of the factors shown in Figure 1. The establishment of antecedent conditions in the form of administrative plans for consultation by resource teachers, with accompanying-exhorta- tions to practitioners, but without adequate training or redefinition of re- spdnsibilities to enable resource teachers to fill this linking function pro- vide no lastingchanges. As Little (1978) has said, Effective communication with regular classroom teachers requires that resource teachers be experts in their own area and also possess change agent's skills Trainees need to ,p n ha nce their skills in such traditionally neglected areas as interpersonal rejations, principals, communication techniques, group process, systematic problem solving, and in- service delivery, Without strong competen- cies in the change-agent areas, technical diagnostic and remediatiun expertise within the consultation process becomes useless and the entire process ineffec-

^ tive. (p. 355) Well-trained consulting resource teachers and administrators plan for school-wide responses to emotionally disturbed behavior in ways that fa- cilitate positive student and staff growth.

Aites and Volunteers Sonie schools have increased their capacity for responding constructivel to disturbed or disturbing behavior through the use of volunteers ur spe- cially trained paraprofessionals. Platt and Platt (1980) have described how one school system obtained strong supporrfrom community volun- teers. A teacher-parent committee was set up to plan the program. They chose a parent to serve as an unpaid volunteer coordinator. Volunteers were recruited by letters and telephone calls.,The coordinator planned schedules, assignments, and orientation sessions, and coordinated a ba- bysitting service as needed. Teachers prepared packets to guide tutors. The volunteers assisted teachers in the regular classroom. Such assis- tance made teacher time available for working on social development or behavior change programs. The author knows of another instance in which a capable volunteer was rer-rAited to, work on a weekly basis with a group of students whose xestles' , and distractibility made it difficult for them to be accommodated on excursions with the rest of the class. The- volunteer planned small group experiences that provided practice in ap- proved behavior outside the school and accompanied them when they went on trips with the larger group.

127 135' Wood

A major weakness of the use of volunteers as part of a comprehensive service delivery.program is the lack of sustaining reinforcement. It is not clear how long the prpgram reported by .Platt and Platt lasted. In the sec- ond example, the voliinteer was unable to continue during a second year despite the entl- ,-tic gratitude of the school staff. Some schools have established lont, ting programs based on the use of paraprofessionals who are paid, but at a lower salary than teachers.

Boomer'(1980a. 1980b) has discussed the importance of proceeding care; fully when employing and using classroom aides. He maintained that it is incorrect to think of paraprofessionals as unskilled. Many possess highly developed skills, but because their experiences vary greatly, their skills need to be evaluated in the context of the position to be filled. As class- room aides, they can be important assets for the classroom teacher in helping to manage the environment and to stabilize the behavior of stu- dents whose low tolerance for frustration or high physical energy levels makes them prone to disruptive behavior. Boomer's suggestions for struc- turing, communication with classroom aides are sound, and indeed, ap- ply to communication among all members of a team working to reduce disturbing behavior. He suggested involving aides in preacademic year planning and regularly scheduled meetings, while following up with written communications about important matters, and on-the-spot com- munication as necessary. Rardin (1978) has described a program in which aides are given special training as consultants with teachers about classroom behavior problems. The "management assistants," as they are called, accept referrals from teachers, observe behavior in the classroom, discuss possible changes in the classroom and ways to build environments that support approved be- havior, provide a linkage with other staff, including special education personnel if needed, and monitor changes in behavior. Beginning in one school, this program has now been replicated in all buildings of the Rose- ville (MN) Public Schools. It should be noted that Rardin selects persons who have good understanding of the dynamics of interpersonal behavior and who can communicate effectively with others. She then trains them for the special tasks'of the management assistant. The fact that the assis- tants are not teachers, and are, in a sense, of lower status than teachers in the formal hierarchy of:the school, serves to minimize friction with class- room teachers. They assist the teacher in problem solving rather than coming into the room as experts to impose their ideas. The management assistant program represents an interesting use of personnel with low for- mal status to promote interdisciplinary collaboration in managing prob- lem behavior. The program has succeeded, and the aides have achieved status through demonstrating their usefulness to teachers.

Specialists Other programs 'have made use of teachers, psychologists, social workers, and psychiatrists to'provide support to regular classroom teachers work-

1281 3 6 Full Service Delivery to Emotionally Disturbed Students

ing with the moderately emotionally disturbed and to activate broader support systems. For example, the Department of Child and-Adolescent Psychiatry at the University of Minnesota Hospitals and the Minneapolis Public Schools, the school districts in which the hospitals are located, jointly employ two school liaison's (Gedo, 1978). Yearly the Department offers both inpatient and outpatient service to more than 100 school chil- dren from a wide geographical region. School personnel are invited to admission and exit conferences if they are able to attend. The school liai- sons provide an outreach from the hospital-basea program to the home schools. Meeting with local school personnel, the liaisons interpret the hospital's l'etiorts and recommendations in the context of what the schools have to offer. Sometimes they act as advocates for children the hospital'staff believes can be maintained in a home-school situation, but whom the schools wish to exclude by sending them to a residential facil- ity. The liaison program provides consultation from expqienced educa- tors who can offer many practical suggestions to local schtiol personnel. The liaisons' work is made more difficult by the fact that they are trying to "sell" a plan for action without being able to commit resources to sup- port program implementation. At times, of course, they can help the schools to obtain support from other agencies. Local school districts have also provided specialized supporting services to teachers by placing professionals usually available only for liniited consultation in roles where they can provide direct service, support, and training. In Montgomery County (PA) Intermediate School District, a pro- gram (Anderson & Marrone, 1977) has trained classroom teachers to work with small student groups as a means of resdiving school conflicts and fostering healthy pelsonai development. Training and support is pro- vided by a social worker/psychiatrist team that works directly in the' schools. Counseling and trthning is,also extended to parents. In the Hop- kins (MN),Public Schools, the SAIL program (Student Advocates Inspire Learning) (Balfour & Harris, 1979) involves adolescent students with high rates of absenteeism whose in-school behavior has been characterized by conflicts with teachers, .failure in academic coursework, and drug use. A social worker/counselor team has trained teachers on special assignment to act ds small-group leaders. The groups focus on setting expectations for shident performance using a Goal Attainment Scaling format andfollow- ing up with discussion of how goals can be attained, as well as whethpr past goals were reached_ Group sessions are supplemented by individual conferences..The SAIL staff also allot time for face-to-face contact with regular classroom teachers, and telephone contact with parents. Students are helped to work through problems with teachers and to find help from other agencies if needed. While the latter two programs are, in many senses, models, both had outside grants to support their initiation. As budget constraints begin to cause program cutbacks, it is hoped that they can be maintained.

k 129 Wood

Schools and Par,ents

Parents of the emotionally disturbed have not seemed to find participa- tion in advocacy groups as rewarding as have parents of other groups of handicapped children. For example, no organizations exist which are similar to.the National AsSociation for Retarded Citizens or the Associa- tion for Children with Learning Disabilities. The aversive quality of the label "emotionally disturbed" may inhibit the parents from organizing around it. It is worthy of note that the National Society for Autistic Adults and Children has adopted statements criticizing the historical classifica- tion of autism as "serious emotional disturbance." The distinction of be- ing emotionally disturbed is not only to be avoided, but is to be repudi- ated! A few local and state parent organizations'exist, but they lack the strength of other parent organizations for the handicapped. This does not mean tbat parents of the emotionally disturbed lack concern for their children. It does indicate that they tend to seek golutions to their prob- lems as individual families rather than as members of groups. Yet, be- cause of the weakness of the formal mechanisms for interdisciplinaryand interagency cooperation, parent advocacy on behalf of moderately emo- tionally disturbed students is badly needed.

The history of the relationships between schools and the parents of mod- erately disturbed students is full of mutual recrimination and misunder- standing; but there are also many examples of effective cooperation. The first step to building cooperation seems to be the willingness to accept joint ownership of the problem. Rather than demanding assistance from parents in changing students' in-school behavior when their understand- ing and skills in managing their children is expected to be less than those of trained professionals, school personnel should approach parents as- suming that they are ready to help if able and if supported.

Stein shared a sensitive story of work with parents in an article in Young Children in 1967. She and her staff of welfare workers sought to imple- ment a plan to teach low-income mothers sound principles of child rear- ing. Fortunately, because of her sensitivity to interpersonal relations; they began by asking the mothers to talk about their own experiences as children and as parents. As the mothers shared the story of their prob- lems and their ingenious ways of coping with them, the professionals' respect for these women's knowledge of child rearing grew. Soon, they realized that they no longer had ideas about ch*f rearing to "lay on" these mothers. The training program that developed was based on mutual sharing and co-counseling of both,parents and professionals.

This sensitive approach characterizes programs like those described by, 13ricker and Caruso (1979) and Warfie Id (1975). In these programs, school personnel began with a commitment to involving parents and then found ways to do it. Bricker and Caruso "found it essential to provide parents with social service assistance and counseling as well as educational in-

130 1 3 b Full Service Delivery to Emotionally Disturbed Students

formation and skill training" (p. 109). In a sense, parents, as well as their children, were clients, until the parents were prepared to provide the supportive services desired by the school. Their program employed a par- ent-resource liaison for whatever assistance needed to enable them to be- come effective coworkers with the school. There are many pitfalls in-building joint support systems with parents coi. emotionally disturbed students. Marion (1980) has written perceptively about the special problems of communicating with the parents of cultur- ally different children. Because such students are too frequently at the center of emotional disturbance in the schools they attend, and because the problems he describes are typical of many other parents of students considered to be school problems, his comments are especkally relevant. He notes that many parents may feel that their children, rather than being accurately described as "behavior problems," are actually gifted, cre- ative, and popular, but "oncthe outs" with school personnel. His descrip- tions of these parents as out-of-touch with. advocacy organizations and "social cliques that obtain and exchange information on an impromptu basis" (p. 619) fit many parents of the emotionally disturbed. Ap- proached by the school with a message of blame, they become angry and' defensive, but approached with sensitivity and concern, they are eager for information. Marion suggests that these parents need advocates rather than critics. De- mands made on them should be appropriatz. Educators should expect, accept, and work through parent anger if it appears. Parents should be assisted in learning their rights and responsibilites under laws and regu- lations; they should be supported in learning to work with professionals. They should be helped to take a,n active part in planning conferences and guided to outside support and advocacy groups if they show an interest in them. As Marion says, rather than being scapegoats for the problems theii children may-behaving in school, parents should be helped to "find satisfaction in learning what can be done for their child and working ac- tively for the child's maximum potential development" (p. 621). If the schools do not involve parents in such constructive ways, they may even- tually find their way to outside advocacy groups who will support their case against the school using adversary methods. The family and the school are two agencies that cannot refuse to accept responsibilitY for students assigned to them for care. Parents and teachers are involved in a joint service delivery system whether they like it or not, so it is in the best interest of all concerned that this relationship be coop- erative and supportive rather than antagonistic.

Conclusion

Full service delivery systems for the support of the education of *students with special needs, including the emotionally disturbed, have long been Wood

a goal of parents and educators. Despite the sound reasonsfor dealing with disturbance in schools from a system- rather than a child-centered perspective, however, we have made little progress in the past 20 years toward establishing interprofessional and interagency collaboration as norm. A viewpoint expressed in this chapter is that thislack of progress is the result of the complexity of the task and the lack of adequate support for such services rather than a lack of sincere cogimitment. Therefore, rather than discussing in detail what should be or might be, examples of what "can be" have been presented. Contemplated in the abstract, a full service delivery system for emotion- ally disturbed students can be analyzed into lists of roles and functions bound together with orderly flows of energy. Perceived from the field, such service delivery systems appear to be disordered, disjointed, and of unmanageable complexity, fragments rather than a whole, and with no sign of a central nervous system. Rather than being overawed by what actually exists, practitioners should approach such systems with the in- tention of working on whatever part of it can be improved through the application of the resources and skills at their disposal, confident that if the functioning of a part is improved, the total system will benefit.

Reference Note

1. Apter, S. J. international perspectives or ecological approaches toseriously emotionally disturbed children: Toward the development of a systems-oriented resource teacher model. Paper presented at the Council for Exceptional Children Topical Conference on Seriously Emotionally Disturbed Children. Minneapolis, MN, August, 1980.

132 Full Service Delivery to Emotionally Disturbed Students

Reference List

Anderson, N. & Marrone, R. T. Group therapy for emotionally disturbed children: A key to affective education. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 1977. 47 (1), 97-103.

Balfodr, M. J. & Harris, L. H. Middle class dropouts: Myths and observations. Education Un- limited, 1979, 1 (1), 12-16.

Bandura, A. Social learning theory. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1977.

Boomer, L. W. Meeting common goals through effective teacher-paraprofessional communica--,. Bon. Teaching Exceptional Children, 1980, 13 (2), 51-53. (a) Boomer. L. W. Special education paraprofessionals; A guide for teachers. Exceptional Chil- dren, 1980. 12 (4), 146-149. (b) Bricker, D., & Caruso, V. Family involvement: A critical component of early intervention. Ex- ceptional Children, 1979, 46 (2), 108-116.

Challenges for Children's Mental Health Services. McLean, VA: Mitre Corporation, 1977.

Evans, S. The consultant role of the resource teacher. Exceptional Children, 1980, 46 (5), 402- 404. Gedo, D. G. Providing technical assistance and advocacy: A liaison program between a mental health unit and the schooR In F. Fl. Wood (Ed.), Preparing teachers to develop end main- tain therapeutic educational environments. Minneapolis, MN: Special Education Programs. University of Minnesota, 1978. Gilliam, J. E. Contributions and status ranking of educational planning committee partici- pants. Exceptional Children, 1979, 45 (61, 466-468. Goldstein, S., Strickland, B.; Turnbull, A. P. & Curry, L. An observational analysis of the IEP conference. Exceptional Children, 1980, 46 (4), 278-286, Grosenick, J. K., & Huntze, S. L. National needs analysis in behavior disorders: A model for ,'comprehensive needs analysis in behavior disorders. Columbia, MO: Department of Special Education, Uniyersity of Missouri, 1979.. Flaring, N. G. Special educatiOn serviOs for the "mildly haddicapped." Journal of Special Ed- ucation, 1977, 11 (2), 189-195. Hollister, W. C & Goldston, S. E. Considerations for planning classes for the emotionally handicapped. Washington, D.C.:Cotiiil for Exceptional Children, 1962, Johnson, D. W. The social psychology of e ucation. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston, 1970. Kauffman, J. K, Where,sPecial education for disturbed children is going: A personal view. Exceptional Children, 1980, 46 (7), 522-527.

Kirkbride, S., & Rohleger, N. A. A relationship between mental health and education. Be- .haviortDisorders, 1978, 3 (2), 127-129. Libbey, P. M. Teachers' conceptions of discipline: A mgnitl@e-developmentel framework. Un- published doctoral dissertation.. University of Minnesota, 1980. Little. T. L. The teacher-consultant modela different perspective: A reaction toSymposium^ 13.1ournal of Special Education, 1978, 12 (3), 345-355. -

1 4 433

a Wood

Marion, R. L. Communicating with parents of culturally diverse exceptional children. Excep- tional Children, 1980, 46 (8), 616-623.

McKenzie, H. Special education and consulting teachers. In F. Clark, D. Evans, & L. Hammer- lynck (Eds.). Implementing behavioral programs for schools. Champaign, IL: Research Press, 1972.

Newcomer, P. L. Special education services for the "mildly handicapped": Beyond a diagnos- tic and remedial model. Journal of Special Education, 1977, 11 (2), 153-165.

Pittenger, J. C. Pennsylvania focusi A philosophy of commitment. Behavioral bisorders, 1979, 2 in 39-40.

Platt, J. M & Platt, J. S. Volunteers for special education: A mainstreanUng support system. Teaching Exceptional Children, 1980, 13 (1), 31-34.

Raiser. L., & Van Nagel, C. The loophole in Public Law 94-142. Exceptional Children, 1980, 46 (7), 516-520.

Rardin, C. A special education mainstream elementary program for behavior and emotion problem students. In F. H. Wood (Ed.), Preparing teachers to develop and maintain thera- peutic educational environments. Minneapolis, MN: Special Education Programs, Univer- sity pf Minnesota, 1978.

Sheare, J. B., & Larson, C. C. Odd couple: Effective public schools/mental health joint program- ming to provide educational therapeutic services to emotionally disturbed students and their families. Psychology in the Schools, 1978, 15 (4), 541-544. 4 Silverman, M. Beyond the mainstream: The special needs of the chronic child patient. Ameri- can Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 1979, 49 (1), 62-68.

Stein, L. S. Techniques for parent discussions in disadvantaged area's. Young Children, 1967, 22, (4) 2182217.

Warfield, C. J. Mothers of retarded children review, a parent education program. Exceptional Childl-en, 1975, 41 (8). 559-562.

1 4

134 Administrative Issues in Educating Emotionally Disturbed Students in the Public Schools

Bill K. Tilley Jerry C. Gross Linda S. Cox

For those in charge of special education programs in local school dis- tricts, the handicapping condition of emotional disturbance presents spe- cial problems. While federal laws are being interpreted by lawyers, civil rights groups, and the courts, special education administrators must daily decide what is best for the children they serve and must carry out those decisions with their best professional judgment. The administrator plays the role of planner, policy maker and interpreter, med'dtor, negotiator, advocate, and, too often, scapegoat, when things do not go well. The ad- ministrator must juggle budget, policy, and contradictory philosophies and attitudes in an attempt to provide a comprehensive service system. This chapter is devoted to administrative perspectives on educating the emotionally disturbed student. In many ways, the processes the adminis- trator uses to develop programs for this group of students are not signifi- cantly different frbm the pro'cesses that are used for developing programs for students with other handicapping conditions. The administrators must make decisions based upon teaching and administrative experi- ence, data, and current kdowledge from the literature about best practices in the field. Although the average administrator tends to be reactive, an active leader- ship role is essential for the development of good programs. This chapter will focus on the major issues in educational service delivery to emotion- ally disturbed students and the elements of an active leadership role asso- ciated with providing these services. 143 135 Tilley, Gross, & Cox

There are four major issues that emerge from the numerous concerns of administrators in providing services to the emotionally disturbed. These issues have surfaced because the legislation (PL94-142and Section 504) has failed to answer many questions, and controversy and litigation have followed. The four issues are: eligibility; placement; discipline, including suspension and expulsion; and provision of related services, including psychological counseling. Administrators must attend to these issues in order to establish the minimum requirements of a legal program; in this sense, then, they are reactive. Other concerns facing a special education administrator include the na- ture of the instructional program, costs, evaluation of programs and ser- vices, and maintaining relationships with teachers' unions. These, issues too, are complex and interrelate with the unique difficulty presented by emotionally disturbed students. Due to the role of 'public lays and court decisions in the developmant of administrative policies and procedures for the emotionally disturbed, ad- ministrators must pay close attention to the rules and regulations associ- ated with PL 94-142 and Section 504, and to the interpretations of these laws from the Office for Civil Rights (OCR), Special Education ProgramS (SEP) (formerly Office of Special Education), their state education agen- cies (SEAs), and judicial decisions. Yet neitherPL 94-142nor Section504 specifically delineates services for any specific category of handicap. This becomes the administrator's domain. The requirements for service are stated generically alid apply to all handicapping conditions. The rules and regulations for each law provide some guidance in the areas of defini- tion, placement, and related services. Each of these laws is monitored at the federal level, Section 504 by OCR and PL 94-142 by SEP within the Education Department (ED), to ensure that agencies receiving federal fi- nancial assistance are employing practices, procedures, and policies con- sistent with the requirements of the law. Thus, while the general direction of programs was legislated (zero reject, nondiscriminatory evaluation, appropriate education, least restrictive placement, procedural due process, and staff and parent participation), the specifics of implementationyere not)given. Where the intent was not clear, hearings, judicial decisions, and policy interpretations by regula- tory agencies have provided some direction. The administrator must use caution, however, in generalizing from specific court cases to conditions in his or her local district. While earlier cases were class action suits and thus had far-reaching implications, decisions of the last few years have been based upon the facts unique to each specific case and cannot be so easily generalized. However, trends appear in these cases which can help the administrator in developing a district policy that is consistent with legal requirements and that constitutes quality education.

144 136 Administrative Issues in Educating the Emotionally Disturbed

The Issues Facing Administrators

Eligibility Services are provided only after the student has been identified as handi- capped, assessed, and found eligible; therefore, the first concern is identi- fication. This is not an easy task with respect to the emotionally dis- turbed. Who is an emotionally disturbed child? Federal definition for serious emotional disturbance specifies several characteristics:

(i) The term means a condition exhibiting one or more of the following char- acteristics over a long period of time and to a marked degree which ad- versely affects educational perrmance: (A)'An inability to learn which cannot be explained by intellectual, sensory, or health factors;

(B)An inability to build or maintain satisfactory relationships with peers and teachers;

(C)Inappropriate types of beha ',Jr or feelings under normal circumstances; (I)) A general pervasive mood of unhappiness or depression; or

(E)A tendency to develop physical symptoms or fears associated with per- sonal or school problems.

(ii)The term includes children who are schizophrenic or autistic. The term does not include children who are socially maladjusted, unless it is deter- mined that they are seriously emotionally disturbed. (Federal Register, 1977, p.12,478) The definition includes children who are schizophrenic, but the defini- tion excludes children who are socially maladjusted unless they are also seriously emotionally disturbed. One major problem for individuals at the service delivery level is how to distinguish between the behaviors labeled social maladjustment and those considered indicative of emotional disturbance. Many agencies and professionals, when asked to diagnose a child, often arrive at different conclusions. There are neqher data nor consensus among professionals with respect to differentiating between these labels. A contributing factor to this lack of consensus is that professionals, in most cases, reflect the viewpoint and philosophy of their training institution. The staff in large, urban districts can therefore represent many colleges and universities, all with different philosophies and approaches to labeling these behaviors. This can result in a staff with almost as many different criteria for social maladjustment and emotional disturbance as there are staff members. Confounding the confusion over definitional criteria is the relentless pressure by teachers and principals to quit the professional quibbling and get some help for the student. This identification problem damages the credibility of the special educa-

137 145 Tilley, Gross, & Cox

tion profession with its colleagues in regular education. Regular educa- tors accuse the special educators of playing semantic games ag a means of avoiding surly, antisocial, aggressive students who either need help or punishment or institutionalizationor, more importantly in their eyes, need to be gone. A second facet of the identification problem, even if one excludes social maladjustment from emotional disturbance, has to do with the variance within the category of emotional disturbance. The federal law and regula- tions, which most states have adopted to guide their own practices, re- quire that the child be seriously emotionally disturbed before being eligi- bleforspecialeducationservices.Guided byfederallaw and interpretations, states have established their own parameters for identifi- cation. The ultimate responsibility for identification, however, falls at the district level, and identification and assessment of emotionally disturbed students are generally based on a diverse set of data generated and com- piled by a multidisciplinary team. The major overriding concern to ad- ministrators is the cost, in terms of time and dollars, which results from this process. The value of a comprehensive multidisciplinary team assessment process can be seriously questioned, in light of at least one example.1 During the 1979-80 school year in the New York City School District, over 40,000 students were referred for the special education identification process, including those who were potentially emotionally disturbed. Individual multidisciplinary evaluations were conducted on these students to deter- mine whether they were in need of special education services. Approxi- mately 38,000 students were subsequently determined to be eligible. One wonders, if teachers are actually identifying students in need of special education services with 95% accuracy and assessments are only legitim- izing teacher referral, what is the purpose of the costly assessment pro- cess? One purpose-of these multidisciplinary team evaluations is to meet the legal state and federal requirements, In this, the local administrator has little flexibility, regardless, of the real value of the process. Given that multidisciplinary team assessment is mandated, the questions of what and how to assess become issues. The,process employed by many school districts for identifying students with behavioral problems is heavily influenced by psychodynamic, theory and employs projective tests and similar clinical measures. This tipproach is focused on deter- mining the "real" cause of student's maladaptive behavioral symptoms. Such assessment is not only costly, but its value in instructional planning is minimal. Also, in light of the previous example, one wonders if these assessments can discriminate emotionally disturbed from nonemotion- ally disturbed students. As an alternative to this assessment, there is a move araong some districts toward use of a discrepant model for identifi-

Personal experience of Jerry Gross as director of Special Education, New York City Public Schools, 1979-1981. 14.... 138 Administrative Issues in Educating the Emotionally Disturbed

cation which relies on measurement of the degree to which a child's be- havior is discrepant from the standards set for the individual child's classroom and, in addition, provides specific information for instruc- tional programming. This latter type of identification process can be much less costly and can encourage the staff to deal individually and di- rectly with the disruptive behavior.

A complicating factor in the-identification and service delivery process is the priorities for service as defined in the law. First priority for services are those handicapped children who are not currently receiving an edu- cation; the second priority are those children with the most severe handi- caps within each disability category who are receiving an inadequate ed- ucation (PL 94-142, Section 3).

Many emotionally disturbed students have dropped out of school or have been expelled and are not receiving educational services. They qualify under the first priority, but because they are not as visible as many of the severely and profoundly handicapped, they are difficult to locate. There are only vague estimates of their numbers. Clearly, these students need services and are a concern to school administrators, but it will take the cooperative efforts of several agencies, such as the courts, to locate and re-enroll them in the school system.

A final problem related to the issue of identification is the consequence of labeling a child "emotionally disturbed." Because of the social repercus- sions of the label, administrators many times are hesitant to label a stu- dent for fear that the.! may have to defend this label in court if the student experiences difficulties in adulthood, such as getting a job. The social and pctssible legal implications of the label make evaluation teams and administrators cautious of misidentification and may, consequently, cause them to deny services.

In summary, each local district, within the parameters of federal and state law, sets its own policies on identification and assessment with regard to emotionally disturbed students. Yet,Jorced to make meaningful policy, district administrator§ may utilize criteria for definition and assessment procedures which may not always correspond precisely to the federal definition or intent. The greatest need for those responsible for direct im- plementation of special education programs is clarification of definition and development of policy for determining eligibility. The profession must more precisely delineate the criteria for determining serious emo- tional disturbance, including what level of "disturbance" should be ex- cluded, as well as the differentiation between socially maladjusted and emotionally disturbed. They must subsequently develop an identifica- tion process that is directly related-to programming. Until there is unifor- mity in the identification process, local special education administrators will continue to be thwarted in their efforts to provide services to this population, regardless of demand.

139 1 4 Tilley, Gross, & Cox

Placement The next major issue facing administrators is determining student place- ment. There is much pressure from regular educators to remove these children from their classrooms and, if possible, to create special classes that separate them from the regular campus. Building principals do not want to cope with students who exhibit socially unacceptable and aggres- sive behavior. In general, principals desire to maintain a stable and calm environment in their buildings, both to foster educational growth and to avoid professional embarrassment. Sti ll,-the law is clear that, to the maxi- mum extent appropriate, handicapped students are to beeducated with nonhandicapped children. For students who exhibit mild emotional di- sabilities, a strong argument could be made in favor of the regular class placement with appropriate support services. Therefore, special educa- tion administrators frequently must, through inservice or staff training, inform, cajole, and convince principals to keep emotionally disturbed students in their home school. A section of PL 94-142 rules and regulations which is devoted to "com- ments" specifically discusses some of the issues related to placement. It is very clear, from these comments, that placement decisions must be made on an individual basis and that the schoql district must have vari- ous alternative placements available in order to ensurethat the handi- capped child receives an educatioii that is appropriate to his or her needs (PL 94-142 Rules and Regulations, 121a.552, 20 USC 1412(5) (B)), Place- ments can range from services in regular classrooms to resource rooms, self-contained classes, home instruction, hospital instruction, and resi- dential treatment. Other types of placements can also be made. If alter- nah placements are considered, then the law requires that the child be pir.ced as close to home as possible and, to the extent that it is appropri- ate, with other nonhandicapped students. Complicating the placement of emotionally disturbed students within the mainstream are the rights of nonhandicapped students, which are addressed in the comment section of PL 94-142. Specifically, this section states: it should be stressed that, where a handicapped child is so disruptive in a regu- lar classroom that the education of other Students is significantly impaired, the needs of the handicapped child cannot be met in that environment. Therefore regular placement would not be appropriate for his or her needs. (PL 94-142) 20 U:.-C 1412 (5) (B)1) Again, there are no specific guidelines or criteria todetermine how much and what type of disruption is intolerable in a regular classroom, and who is to determine what is intolerablea multidisciplinary team or a regular classroom teacher. Under these constraints, placement decisions for any handicapped student are rarely easy to make and are often chal- lenged by parents. With respect to the emotionally disturbed, the admin- istrator.is faced with pressure from building principals and regular teach- ers to remove children from the mainstreamregardless of the educational implications, while parents may pressure for private facilities.

.146 140 Administrative Issues in Educating the Emotionally Disturbed

The option for residential placement can be one of the most difficult ad- ministrative decisions. The responsibility for determining need, as well as costs for providing residentialplacement, have been interpreted through a number of court cases and state rulings to reside with the local school district. Such placement is an option even when the primary -needs of the child are not educational. An OCR ruling, "Education for the Handicapped Law Report" (EHLR 257:55), indicated that educational needs are not defined in purely acadeniic or special education terms and that the school district had to pay for residential placement costs related to the child's emotional 'needs. These decisions, however, are often in nflict (EHLR 501:302; EHLR 501:315) and again require that an admin- istrator carefully scrutinize decisions as well as each individual place- ment decision.

Another placement issue is expulsion. Expulsion is considered to be a change in placement and thus requires a reevaluation and a revision of the IEP. Building principals have a great deal of discretion and authority to expel students, but with respect to emotional disturbance and other handicaps, they should be required to seek approval from or at least con- sult with the department of special education. Because this form of disci- plinary action is frequently used, it constitutes a major placement issue with building principals. Expulsion as a disciplinary tool will be dis- cussed later in this chapter.

An issue related to placement concerns the instructional options and set- tings available in a district. Current instructional arrangements for edu- cating students with emotional d; Aurbancg ur behavior disorders reveal wide diversity from school district to school district as well as within district programs. Some districts offer only self-contained classes for all emotionally disturbed students regardless of severity, while others pro- vide a full continuum of services, beginning with consultation to the regular class teacher in the student's home school, through resource room service, to self-contained_classes. Adding to this diversity is the current trend in the organization and administration of special education pro- grams which recognizes the commonality of instructionalneeds among certain special education categories, especially for children with mild handicapping conditions. In these programs, students are grouped in re- source and self-contained classes according 'rotheir functional learning needs, even if these students do not have a common label. Recent litera- ture (Hallahan & Kauffman, 1978; Kauffman, 1976; Neisworth & Greer, 1975) has supported this trend. This concept of non-categoricalplace- ment makes it much easier to provide special education in less restrictive settings,.because one special education teacher can serve a larger number of students who have similar instructional needs There is aneed for comprehensive evaluation of such programs in order to assure that maxi- mum learning is occurring and that, infact, the functionally grouped classroom is the appropriate setting for the emoticnally disturbed child. Informal data gathered from functionally grouped classrooms supports this concept, but systematic, controlled studies are needed for actual veri-

141 1 4 Tilley, Gross, & Cox

fication, particularly because there is so much resistance and controversy about this instructional concept. Discipline: Suspension, Expulsion, Corporal Punishment With the increasing conservative movement in education and in the country as a whole, tolerance for any type of behavior disorder is waning. Education systems are moiting toward an increased emphasis on academ- ics or the "basics" of education. Community groups or committees are being formed to lobby for a return to academic excellence as the major goal of education. Programs of counseling, remediation, and psychologi- cal and social work services are at risk in the face of this new movement, Even vocational and career education programs, so important in our re- cent past, are beginning to be deemphamed. More and more states are legislating successful completion of competency tests before granting a diploma to a student. Although there are positive aspects to this pursuit of academic excellence, there also are risks that only the academically elite and the conforming personality may survive. In the large cities, the dropout rates.,for adolescents are staggering. Expulsion and suspension figures are large and growing. Discipline problems continue as the major concern of the American public in regard to the educational system. In the face of all this, emotionally disturbed students who are seen as troublemakers, or are aggressive and act out, may be in for great turmoil. Where previously there was support and a spirit of rehabilitation, there is now a renewed emphasis cm conformity and discipline. Without the pro- tection of law and without the advocacy of the special education depart- ment of local school systems, there may be sucCessful attempts simply to get rid of these students through a number of means, ranging from expel- ling students to intimidating students and parents to leave school of their own volition. With respect to misconduct and discipline, building level administrators must determine whether the misconduct is related to the student's handi- cap. If a student's inEippropriate behavior is not related to the handicap, then the disciplinary procedures approved for nonhandicapped students can be used. If, however, the inappropriate behavior is related to the handicap, then appropriate instructional interventions and positive dis- ciplinary techniques are required. An emotionally dfsturbed student's primary defining handicap is inappropriate behavior; therefore, he or she cannot be punished for displaying that handicap. Consequently, such techniques must be listed as options on the IEP for all emotionally dis- turbed students. In most cases, suspension and/or expulsion are not con- sidered appropriate disciplinary techniques for emotionally disturbed students, and if used, are considered changes in placement (EHLR 551:211). The conttoversy regarding the use of suspension and expulsion with handicapped students is evidenced by a growing number of OCR cases

1 142.1.t.) Administrative Issues in Educating the Emotionally Disturbed

against.school districts (EHLR 257:29, EHLR 257:09, and EHLR 257:71). Among the decisions rendered in these cases is a required reevaluation before expulsion (EHLR 57:132), a limit on the number of days a student may be expelled during one school year (EHLR 551:164),and limits on when a student maybe subject to emergency removal from school (EHLR 551:109). It is apparent from even a cursory review of these specific cases 'that procedural safeguards and Section 504 rquirements must be closely fol- lowed. Appropriajeness of the original placement is questioned in many suspenskm/exputsron cases, and to determine such appropriateness, re- evaluation or reassessment must be done. Also., the inappropriate behav- ior must be evaruated in terms of the handicap before actions can be taken. After all 6f these procethires, a local district must have several al- ternatives to pursue. Under certain conditions emergency suSpensions can also be initiated, but.they cannot he abused, andlocal policy must be established to limit their use.. ez A further issue in discipline is corporal punishment, which is governed by ,state and not federal law (Flygare, 1978). If it is permitted by a state and if members of the interdisciplinary team and parents feel that it would be an appropriate disciplinary tool, then the conditions, circum- stances, and type of;corporal punishment to be used should be listed -,on the IEP. In few cases, however, is corporal punishment considered appro- priate. In summary, it isapparent`that school districts need todevelop and im- plement disciplinary procedures especially for emotionally disturbed children. By stating in the IR') the types of consequences and pilnish- ments, if any, that are to,be used with an individual studentfor miscon- duct related to emotional disturbance, the procedures are outlined in ad- vance and all parties are protected.

Related Services Providing related services for emotionaly disturbed students, as well as for students with other handicaps, is Controversial because of the poten- 'dal high costs associated with them. Related services are defined in PL 94-142 (Reg. 121a.13) as transportation and such developmental, correc- tive, and other supportive services (including speech pathology and audi- ology, psychological services, physical and occupational therapy, recre- ation, and medical and counseling services, except that suchmedical services shall be for diagnostic and evaluation purposes only) as maybe required to assist a handicapped child to benefit from special education, including the early identification and assessment of handicapping condi- tions in childrem In terms of relatIgd services, most professionals feel thatemotiopally dis- turbed children could benefit from some typeOf additional cOunseling

143 15i .71 Tilley, Gross, & Cox

services, but no data exist to indicate how much, of what type, and for what duration. Typically, these services are long term and there is no limit on the demand for the service.

A major concern about related services is whether mental health services include psychotherapy and psychoanalysis. Many cases have been heard by OCR, SEAs and SEP in the last few years. In response to questions from the field, SEP.developed a policy for review which stated that if evaluation results indicated a need for related services, then the related service must be listed in the IEP and provided without cost to parents. This specifically included counseling, psychological services, and men- tal health services. Each state was given the discretion to determine eligi- bility standards, with the exception that if residential placement were the appropriate educational program, then'mental health services must be provided. Ordinarily- they are not provided in a residential facility be- cause in suchA facility mental health services are seen as "medical care" (EHLR, Supplement 28, July 25, 1980, AC 20).

This policy will have far-reaching implications if it is adopted, and "un- less the policy conclusion is completely reversed in the subsequent ver- sion, it appears that educational agencies will be required to provide psy- chotherapy as a related service under the appropriate circumstances" (EHLR, Analysis and Comment, Supplement 28, July 25, 1980, AC 20).

At present there are no guidelines that assist in determining when related services are necessary so that a handicapped student can take full advan- tage of his or her educational opportunity. Without limits or criteria, re- quests for such service can easily exceed a schoadistrices ability to pro- vide them, and with special education budgets already stretched to their limits, this additional service will be a great financial burden.

Despite the lack of specificity and the confusion, PL 94-142 and Section 504 have improved opportunities for emotionally disturbed students to receive a free, appropriate education in the least restrictive placement. Such students can no longer be summarily excluded from school nor can their educational needs be ignored. The public schools, while resistant to change, have made major modifications over- a few short years (1975- 1981) in the service delivery systems to accomodate these students.

On the other hand, the legislation, with its cumbersome regulations and underfunding, has frustrated everyone. For the local special education administrator to survive, he or she must exer,t tight managerial andorgan- izational control to develop and maintain a legal program with ever-tight- ening budgets. These Constraints effectively squelch most creative and imaginative problem solving and program development, and create the notion that all special education administration is concerned with only technical compliance. The next section suggests some positiveresponses to this professional dilemma. 454' Administrative Issues in Educating the Emotionally Disturbed

Program Administration

The importance of the administration in the success of special education programs is often overlooked or misunderstood by parents and other pro- fessionals. In addition, there is very little information in the literature re- garding the leadership role played by administrators. This seCtion deals with important aspects of a well-administered program and provides spe- cific examples relating to programs for emotionally disturbed children.

Philosophy The special education administrator must establish a clear philosophical base to guide program decisions and development. Without clear state- ments of values, programs tend to disintegrate into loosely joined, highly variable, individual efforts. It is not uncommon to visit a school system and observe staff members operating programs with, almost no coordina- tion from program to program, class to class. One classroom may be highly structured, while another may be a random assortment of tech- niques and materials. One may stress academia and another may stress behavioral control. To prevent such disarray, the teachers, parents, regu- lar building administrators, and related service personnel must know the professional direction the program is following and must know their con- tribution to that program. The developmeni of a program philosophy should not be a unilateral ac- tivity, but should involve a brOad range of interested persons and should reflect state-of-the-art information and trends, coupled with knowledge of legal requirements. The critical skill required of the administrator in this process is the ability to identify the important opinion makers and stakeholders in the community, bring them together with appropriate in- formation, and gain consensus on the values to be pursued by the pro- gram.. The philosophy should be clearly articulated in statements that include direct service goals as well as provision of inservice and support to regu- lar education and that specify parent involvement. An example of a spe- cific philosophy presently in use follows:

Providing a comprehensive array of instructional and related service op- tions tc, provide a free and appropriate education foran handicapped chil- dren frtki birth through 21 years of age. Such services should be arranged on a contheuum of restrictiveness to assure meeting the individualneeds of children who have mild through severe handicapping conditions. Providing a systematic support system to regular education, designed to help it manage and teach a broader range of individual differences. Such support should be aimed at mainstreaming children in the regular class- room and preventing undue labeling and segregation ofchildren. It also should aid in the integration of children who have been in more segregated settings into the regular classroom. 15 3

145 Tilley, Gross, & Cox

Supporting and complying with State and Federal laws governing the de- livery of educational services to children with handicaps. Acting as an advocate for children with handicapping conditions and their parents. Working as a cooperating partner with regular education, community groups, and other agencies to rnaximjze services to children with handi- caps in order to reduce duplication of effort. Working closely with tile parents and families of children with handicaps to assure a cooperative, tinderstanding atmosphere in the joint pursuit of appropriate service systems. 4 Developing a quality, large city program that can serve as a model for urban services. Such a program should seek to incorporate the best professional thinking and practices in its design and implementation. Providing ongoing educational opportunities for parents and pr ofessionals to assure the continuing upgrading of skills and information necessary for program improvement. Establishing ev'aluation mechanisms for describing and measuring positive student change as the primary intended outcome of all services and using such information to modify individual and system programs to meet that end. Provtaing services in the most normal kind of setting possible for all lil- dren and preventing unnecessary segregation of children, that is,.least es- trictive environment. Utilizing the regular education curriculum and feeder pattern as a base to establish specialized programs for children with handicaps. Viewing children with handicaps as part of a larger environment, that is, an ecological model. Sometimes the environment, rather than the child; may need to change. Viewing laws, policies, and regulations as variables to be modified if they do not support these philosophical directiOns. Funding sourceslocal, State, or Federalwill be actively pursued to support these directions. Considering that children with handicaps are children first and handi- capped second, and consequently should have the same rights and oppor- tunities as all children. Developing individualized aproaches to educational services. Designing programs based upon the educational needs of child' en rather than on disability categories. Preventing practices that tend to stigmatize children in undesirable, stereo- typed ways. - 2 Encouraging normal individuals in society to understand and accept indi- viduals with handicaps as a normal environmental situation and to react in healthy and supportive ways. Providing programs to prepare students to be successful members of soci- ety both socially and vocationally. 15,1 146 Administrative Issues in Educating the Emotionally Disturbed

While such statements are broad, they represent the standard against which more specific goal statements for individual program areas such as emotional disturbance can be measured. Program development activities can then be constantly reviewed in light of consistencywith overall pro- gram goals and direction.

Policy Development Once a program philosophy is established, it is important for the admin- istrator to establish and gain support for departmental and district pol- icyor a set of rules and guidelines. Policy, along with accompanying procedures, provides the daily guideposts for the implementation of the philosophical direction. Policy is more specific than the philosophy and clearly specifies behavior expected of every staff person in the targeted policy areas. 'The importance of this function cannot be overemphasized. Without a body of policy sanctioned by the highest levels of authority, staff may act in arbitrary fashionin many instances contradictory to the values estab- lished. Administrators of special education programs often complain that principals do not cooperate or that personnel policies impede recruit- ment or that some other unit in the system acts in anobstructive fashion. These kinds of problems can usually be traced to a lack of effectivepolicy abeitit special education. Once policy is established by the school board or the upper administration, every wor: 1r isbound by that policy until it is changed. Major issues in need of policy development have already been noted. Such areas as definition of emotional disturbance, identification pro- cesses, provision of related services, models ofintervention, discipline, and evaluation require policy and procedures if a prOgrr n is to operate effectively, efficiently, and consistently.

Recommendations Because much of the referral and evaluation activities occur at thebuild- , ing level and involve a number of buildinglevel staff, there can be room for error and misunderstanding. Consequently, it is necessary todevelop and prepare in writing specific guidelines that detail all procedures, in- cluding team composition and roles, due process rights and notice to par- ents, critical forms for the'control of the process, anddefinitions of eligi- bility. As in philosophy development, policy development mustbe an open, en- lightened process. The administrator should encourage wide participa- tion in the process and insist on the most current andrelevant profes- sional information being available for each area in need of policy.Only through such a process can policy be established that has wide support

147 1 5 5 Tilley, Gross, & Cox

and is useful in wide applications. Again, the key skills hereare gaining public consensus, awareness of the issues in need of policy making, anda thorough, professional knowledge of current trends and best practices in the field. ,

While having clear policies and procedures forprogram operation does not mitigate the need for careful and sensitive communication at all levels, it does prevent misunderstandings and confusidn thatcan lead to seriousNconflict and interpersonal difficulties. Working with emotionally disturb&I children, whether as a principal, teacher, parent,or special ed- ucation dir,tor, is at best a stressful endeavor. Tempers tend to be short and frusfratioIimany. Clearly defined expectatious and guidelines for action can avoi "reactive" situation and can assist others, such as teachers or principals, in planning their ownprograms of developingal- ternatives consistent with general policy. Sound policy clears theway for more productive commuication, such as prevention and program im- provement. Continuous hassles about "what is" prevent pursuing "what can be." .

Program Design Armed with knowledge about the issues, and experience and training in operating programs for the emotionally disturbed, what isa reasonable program for an administrator to establish? This questinn is difficult to an- swer because there are few data to support the effectiveness of the various administrative and instructional options for these services. The local dis- trict, however, must establish a service delivery system that meets federal and state requirements and at the same time operates ina flexible, re- sponsive manner to meet both the concerns of the staff and parentsancl the demands of the local budget. Naturally, it also must be consistent with district philosophy and policy, as noted above. The first task in designing a program for emotionally disturbed children is to develop an overall, comprehensive service delivery model for the special education program. This model should be generative and inclu# NN sive of many specific classroom or support options. One of the mostac- cepted and useful conceptual models available to the field is the Cascade of Education Services model developed by Deno (1970) (Figure 1). This model provides for a close and logical link between special and regular education and accomodates the least restrictive environment require- ment. Many modifications of this basic model exist.

The Special Education Continuum Services Model (Figure 2) depictsone such modification. The continuum of services includes the aggregate of educational and psychological interventions for the emotionally dis- turbed student, beginning in 0-Le regular cless and moving through self- contained classes and servic.is. In the following description of thiscon- tinuum, emphasis will be on those sections of the model most relevant to the emotionally disturbed student in a public school setting. Serviceop-

1:50 4

Administrative Issues in Educating the Emotionally Disturbed

Children in regular classes, including those "handicapped" able to get along with regular Level I class accommodations with or without medical or counseling supportive therapies "OUT-PATIENT" PROGRAMS Regular class attendance phis Level II supplementary instructional services (Assignment of pupils governed by the school Part-time system) Level III special class

Level IV Full-time special class

Special Level V stations

Level VI Homebound

Instruction in "IN-PATIENT" Level VII hospital or PROGRAMS domiciled settings (Assignment of / \ children to "Noneducational" facilities service (medical and governed by / welfare care and health or supervision) welfare agencies)

Figure 1: Cascade of Education Services

The cascade system of special education service. The tapered design indicates (he considerable difference in the numbers involved at the different levels and calls attention to the fact that the system serves as a diagnostic filter. The most special- ized facilities are likely to be needed by the fewest children on a long term basis. This organizational model can be applied to development of special education ser- vices for all types of disability. Note: From "Special Education as Developmental Capital" by E. Deno, .Excep- tiOnal Children, 1970, 37. 229-237. Copyright 1970 by the Council for Exceptional Children. Reprinted by permission.

149 157 School Psychology

School Social Work Home School and Health Hospital Residential Traditional Programs Special Education Programs and Day Schools Services Special Stations and Special Class Clusters

Special Classes

Resource and Tutorial Programs Mainstream Diagnostic Assessment and/or Prescriptive Programs and Services Consultation to Parents and/or Regular Class Teacher -9 0 cn cn

Figure 2: 0 Special Education Continuum of Service,s Model Administrative Issues in Educating the Emotionally Disturbed

tions for students with more severe behavioral difficulties that necessi- 'tate placement outside the regular public schools will not be covered. No attempt will be made to isolate the precise point in the continuum where service for the mildly emotionally disturbed student begins, as this poin' will vary from school district to school district and ultimately will be de- termined by individual educational needs. For example, some districts take the position that students who have emotional difficulties must be served exclusively in self-contained classes, while other districts provide such services to these students, at least initially, within the csntext of the regular class. The reader is encouraged to make the distinction between mild, moder- ate, or severe in relation to his or her own circumstances or experience.

The Continuum Reviewed

Level I: Consultation The continuum of services begins with the preventive service of consulta- tion, and may be delivered by any member of a school support team to teachers within the regular class before a youngster isidentified as having a handicapping cond:n. The school support team traditionally in- cludes a school psychologist, a school social worker, a guidance coun- selor, a special education teacher or supervisor, arid the p-incipal. The consultation level is not necessarily child centered nor is it category spe- cific. The focus on this level of service is on the study of the relationship and adjustment of the student to the educational environment. In the past, edycators have too often concluded that if a youngster were not ,learning or behaving properly, the problems resided within the child. In the consultation level of service, attention is paid to behaviors of the 4eacher, tlie physical environment, and the dynamics of social structure in the classall of which could contribute to an individual student's be- havior problems.

Under the consultation process, activities of the school team members may include classroom observation, review of student records and class- work, and discussions with the classroom teacher and other members of the school staff. At this level there is no testing, formal interviewing, or direct work with the student. Again, emphasis, is on an analysis of the factors in the educational environment which are affecting learning and behavior of the student. The outcome(s) of consultation should provide the teacher or parent with constructive suggestions for remediating the student's behavioral problems without the team members' providing di- rect services to the student. The first level of service in the continuum is not a traditional part of the special education program because it is pre- ventive and indirect, but it needs to become a standard offering in our schools. 15

151 Tilley, Gross, & Cox

When consultation or indirect service does not solve the student's prob- lem, a second level of service, still preventive, rimy be necessary. This level is designed to accomplish a broader and more in-siepth study of the problem.

Level II: Informal Assessment This level of preventive service requires parent permission and a greater level of parent involvement and responsibility. The intent of informal as- sessment, as with consultation, is to allow the emotionally disturbed stu- dent to receive maidmum benefit from education in the regular education environment. Often, this means suggestions from the team to the teacher in areas of instruction, teaching strategies, or classroom management. The outcome of informal assessment may also result in suggestions to the parents or to the student in behavioral, social, and academic areas. The activities of informal assessment include direct interviews or discu's- sions with the student, observations of the student in various school set- tings, and review of the student's records and work. The team does not engage in any testing of the student at this level. The team's social worker and guidance counselor have a major responsi- bility for actively involving parents in the process. The social worker meets with the parents and discusses their goals and/or expectations for the student, their perception of the problem, and behaviors exhibited at home. The parents are apprised of the services of the school team, the process of informal assessment, and what procedures will takeplace. At the completion of the informal -assessments by the team, parents are in- vited to an informal assessment conference. Results of the assessment are discussed, with emphasis given to the student's need for support within the educational program. The outcomes of this conference may result in the formulation of guidelines for the teacher and parent in working with the student. Definition of limits and clarification of what is expected of the studeht are made. The social worker or psychologist may be helpful in arranging for parent and child involvement with community agencies. Because the school systems are not staffed with personnel to provide long-term therapeutic assistance., outside agencies are important sources for the prbvision of such services. Another outcome of the informal as- sessment process may be a recommendation for non-special-education school services for enrichment or remediation, =suckas remedial reading or music and art programs.

Level III: Formal Assessment. The third level of service, formal assessment, is initiated when consulta- tion and informal assessment procedures do not result in the desired be- havioral changes. This process includes an assessment of the student's behavioral, academic, and intellectual levels of functioning and should 1.6u

152 Administrative Issues in.Educating the Emotionally Disturbed

be consistent with federal law, which requires that assessments becon- ducted by mUltidisciplinkry teams. The multidisciplinary team utilizes a broad range of assessmentstrate- gies, including interviews with the student and parent, observatioh of the student in the regular class environment to collect baseline dataon the student's behavioral problems, norm-referenced and criterion-referenced testing, and a revieW of existing school and related agency reports. The assessment model and specific procedures employed are highly depen- dent on the conceptualization of emotionally disturbed, but frequently the entire process is eclectic. That is, behavioral and traditional psycho- logical assessment procedures° are employed. At the completion of thee, formal assessment, an educational planning conference is conducted.At this conference, the pa-rents of the child, the multidisciplinaryteam members who have worked withthe child, and other school membersare, invited to attend. An IEP is developed, whichmay include any of the in- terventions, including disciplinary procedures previously discussed, and may or may not also include direct services to the student from a special education resource teacher or related services personnel.

Level IV: Direct Interventior, At this level direct interventim from special education personnelcan in- clude resource room service of part-time special class service. Gearhart and Weishahn (1976) delineate the advantages offered to the emotionally handicapped student by retaining the regular classroom placement: 1. The student has an opportunity to observe appropriate behavior of his peers, and interact with his/her peers. 2. The student has the opportunity to experience appropriate expressions of emotions. 3. The student has the opportunity to receive support from his peers. 4. The student has the opportunity to feel that he is more like his peers than different from them.

The resource room can serve as an effective backup to the efforts being made to serve these students in the regular class. A final step in thecon- tinuum of services for the emotionally distufbed student in the regular public school would be placement in a self-contained special education class. Wherever feasible, the emotionally handicapped student in the self-contained environment should be included in classes and activities in the mainstream. For those students in the specialized environments, progress should be closely monitored so that they may be returned to the mainstream as soon as appropriate.

Intervention Strategies

Within the framework of the range of service options, the administrator 16i 153 Tilley, Gross, & Cox

may incorporate any number of specificinstructional approaches to working with emotionally disturbed children. One example of the inter- action possible between the range of services concept and aspecific ap- proach is the Madison School Plan, developed in the Santa Monica School District in California (Hewett & Forness, 1977). Theplan calls for organizing the education program in one learning center withseveral dif- ferent instructional settings, based upon the functional learning needsof the children. This model deemphasizes traditionaldisability categories as the basis for grouping and organizing services. The model designates four settings based on assessment of thechild's readiness for regular classroom hulctioning. These settings are Pre-aca- demic I, Pre-academic II, Academic I, and Academic H. Note that the set- tings are labeled, not the child.

Pre-Academic I This setting in the learning center is the most intensive and highly struc- tured and stresses the most fundamental of adaptive skills related to suc- cessful integration. Such skills as sitting in seat, following directions,tak- ing turns, getting along with peers, and functioning in groupinstruction are taught in this setting. There islittle time spent in the regular class- ^ room for this group, but behaviors leading tothat option are stressed.

Pre-Academic II The emphasis in this setting shifts to academic skills. Thechildren work in groups of six to eight and are encouraged to work togetherand to coop- erate. This section works on social interaction andparticipation in group lessons. Integration occurs for each student for some amounteach day.

Academic I This is a simulated regular classroom setting for 12 to 25 childrenwho require some special attention for academic problems, but canbe main- tained in a large classroom setting. Group discussion, grouplessons, and independent study resemble theq-egular classrom, but incroasedempha- sis is phiced on skills needed for regular classroomplacement.

Academic II This is a regular classroom setting including 28 to 35 students.Students from Pre-academic II and Academic I grades are integrated herefor vary- ing amounts of time. This operational model for serving emotionally disturbedchildren in 1

cr3 on z CD 00 a". P10"": Psychology t")tr [School g cn School CD 17j cD0 5C.4. Social Work 't0"" cn CIC1 a) School o CD 0. °Health . 0cn CD cn 4.) ;1- 0- Residential oco0' Programs cn " CD cn CD Day Schools CD

Special Stations ETT -6-2) and Pre-academic I ro CD Special Class Clusters 51 0 o

0 CD Oa. Special Classes Pre-academic II o ccg 6 Academic I CD 0 Resource and Tutorial Programs < CIO0 n ry ,CD Diagnostic Assessmant and/or Prescriptive CD

Consultation to Parents and/or Academic II 0 0" g Regular Class Teacher o CD

CD D..)

. cn CD 0 Figure 3: o r.z: Special Education Continuum of Services Model CD 0 CD Tilley, Grossi& Cox

Instructional Methodology

One of the special eduction administrator'sresponsibilities in terms of policy development is to reconcile the differences in treatmentinterven- tion philosophies as they apply to the emotionallydisturbed. Some areas of the country are heavily influenced by psychodynamicphilosophies and practices, while others are more convinced that operantbehavioral approoches are more effective. In between are numerous other treatment approaches that may incorporate reality therapy, transcendental medita- tion, life-space interviewing, group encounters, transactionalanalysis, values clarification, and other popular treatment systems, manyof wiiich are derived from basic personalitytheories. The controversy over intervention models became apparentalmost two decades ago, with two models that could not have been further apart.The basic controversy is referred to as the "internal deviancy" versusthe "be havioral" model. The chief characteristic of the internal deviancymodel is its em,,'Iasis on internal factors as major sourcesof symptomatic be- havioral or learning deviancy. The behavioral approach, in contrast,fo- cuses on present environmental eventsand the effects these events have on the child's learning andbehavior (Gardner, 1977). While today there are programs that adhere to onemodel or the other, more often programs incorporate some strategies from both. Examples ofthese two models in- clude the Berkowitz and Rothman (1960) model, the "600"schools in New York City. 1 iiey maintained that behaviorproblems occurred when the internal conflict of a child was resolved by the acting-outof the con . flict in an unacceptable way. To deal with this acting-outbehavior, they advised that the atmosphere of the classroom should bepermissive, with students working on their own projects (academic ornonacademic), se- cure in the knowledge that what they, weredoing would be loolr:-,d upon with approval and would be of value to the teacherand peers. The teacher in this setting was not concerned with skill acquisition *disci- pline, but with "teaching" emotions. Teachers in thismodel were told to accept the behavior of the child in the class no matterhow unacceptalile that behavior might seem to be. The teacher would acceptaggression and not pressure withdrawn students tato socializing.Clinical judgment re- garding needs as well as program effects were utilized. At the other end of the continuum, Haring andPhillips (1962) had devel- oped an empirically based structured classroom programthat they felt was beneficial to the student'semotional as well as4acadetnic growth. In their model the emotionally disturbed child was givenclear directives based on firm expectations. Intervention included academicinstruction and behavior management. Consistent follow-up wasmandated to let the student know that expectations would hold from day today and these expectations in instructional tasks were structured toprovide the student ample opportunity to earn success, the foundation uponwhich the pro- gram was based. Emotional upsets werehandled in a matter-of-fatt "back to work" manner, This latter method was aclear signal that if these emo-

164 156 - Administrative Issues in Educatingthe Emotionally Disturbed

tional upsets were responded to with warm, accepting, kindness thr, teacher would, in effect, be reinforcing thesebehaviors and they would'' continue to occur. The problem created by divergent philosophies such as these arises when teachers from a wide variety of training programs emphasizing different approaches come together in a singre place. It becomes very difficult to develop a consistenrphilosophy and treatment approach under these pnditions. Teachers trained under one specific instructional philosophy have deeply ingrained attitudes that their approach is the best, and if ad- ministrators want to adopt one consistent instructional approach for the district, they meet strong resistance. Administrators, ..however, havp tended toward behaviorally based and data-based instructional systems because they aremore accountable. These systems that clearly or operationally define the target behaviors for intervention and that specify the conditions under which such behavior will have to occurvhave a better opportunity tomeasure the degree to which a program orintervention was or was not successful. All parties teacher, student and administratorsknow when the instructional tech- niques are working because measures of their Success can be consistently monitored.

The need for accountability and program evaluation is more critical than resolving philosophical differences. By focusing on specific child perfor- mance data, the effect of instruCtional methodologies may be determined. and those that are successful can be incorporated into policy. Once the major task% of developing a departmental philosophy, establish- ing operational policy, and designing the overall service delivery struc- ture are completed, the next steps of successful administration involve the conscious design of a management system. Without-sucha system the administration of programs may merely become a series of problgm-solv- ing episodes.

Principles of Management

so In reflecting on the variables that seem to account for the differences be- tween successful and unsuccessful management of special education pro- grams, several basic principles stand out: priority setting, organizhig for change. setting-and managing objectives, training for excellence, eval- uating, and using of politics.

Prioriiy Setting InS-etting priorities it is important that the tasks required by lacw and pol- icy be tackled first. It is a maxim that ate must do what has to be, clone

-157 165 Tilley, Gross, & Cox

before one can do what one would like to do. This maxim is not always a popular one to follow. Professionals would rather be involved in the ex- citing, innovative program development activities: Parents want immedi- ate upgrading of the curriculum and instruction for their children. Still, when the "musts" are neglected, conflicts=begin to increase. Thus, it is important to involve a broad range of individuals, including parents and general education administrators, in the priority.setting process. It has been estimated that there are over 400 compliance requirements in PL., 94-142; only a few of these resultant dilemmas have been addressed in this paper. A district.must plan well for meeting these "musts."-

Organizing for Change

Typical .organizational charts or schemata for special education struc, tures emphasize the day-to-day operational functions. The system chosen can reveal inuch'about the philosophy and directionof the unit,. For ex- ample, if administrators are assigned to categorical responsibilities (e.g., Supervisor of Programs for the:Emotionally Disturbed), then the district probably focuses its services and delivery model categorically. There will likely be glasses for mentally retarded children, for emotionally disturbed children, and for other disability ,categofies. If administrators are as- signed by level (e.g., elementary, seCondary) or by genericeategories (e.g., mildly handicapped, moderately handicapped), then it is likely that the program delivery focuses more on the functional needs of childrenthan on assumed needs associated with the disability categories. Another way a district can organize is to focus on the criticl tasks to be accomplished at any given time. In this system. (he organizational struc- ture is fluid in order to meet the changing conditions of thedistrict. It is very difficult in a large special education program to makesignificant chariges while continuing to run the current program. For example, in one school syst m in which one of the authors was in- volved, a major weakness existed in the program for emotionally dis- turbed children. The program was categorically based with heavy empha- sis on self-contaiped classrooms. Children were grouped simplyby label, not by assessed level of needs. Teachers were poorly trained, andhad no consistent professional orientation toward the program. In addition, they generally had low academic and behavioral expectations for the students. The program emphasized crafts, free reading (usually of pulp-type maga- zines), and permissiveneSs. Behavior management tools such as contin- gency contracts were notevident, nor were instructional programs. The prograin resembled a school-based halfway house.Needless to say, this situation,produced constant conflict and frustration. Over time, princi- pals refused* to have such programs in deft buildings. Administrators moved from one crisis situation to another, and there was no time to ana- lyze the problems. There were also problems in other areas, chiPf among

66 158 Administrative Issues in Educating the Emotionally Disturbed

them noncompliance With federal and state laws. At the peak of frustra- tion the head administrator of special education was fired anda new in- dividual was hired.

The new administrator immediately saw that there would be little chance of altering the situation without a major orgapizational change. Without kncreasing the number of management positions, the administratorcre- ated two major branchesone for uperations andone for program de.vel- opment. Program development became the organizational change unit. Its staff conducted surveys and studies necessary to analyzectheextent and nature of the problems; they brokered services from the lotai unWersities and colleges to help plan nevi" approaches; they wrote grants to help with staff Uaining: and they worked to develop a computer-based datasystem for management. In the meantime the operations division kept things running and was even able to improve uri efficiency of operationalprac- tices. The units worked closely together to assure coorckination, andover a pe- riod of two years, many curricular and instpactional changeswere insti- tuted without major interruption. This structure is still in operation and probably will remain for three to five more years, when most of the changes will have been completed; at that dine another structurednay be needed.

The key point of this discussion is that the organizational structure in and of itself should neither be overlooked in the developme. t of educational prograrns,gor should it be considered inviolate. Instead, it should be con- sidered a variable, capable of redesign whenever the organizational tasks require such action.

Setting Objectives Once a philosophy is established and major priorities determined, the process of setting specific objectives to guide the year-by-year work needs to begin. This step is often missing in programs that gre in trouble. Usu- ally, philosophy and priority statements are too broad to be useful in the actual management of the organization; therefore, the broad statements eed to be refined or task analyzed. The work has to be clearly specified as outcomes, and time and resources (e.g., personnel) have to be assigned to objectives. Again, it is helpful to involve a broad ba.,,e of interested parties in setting work objectives, especially the staff who are expected tocarry out these objectives. Input should be gathered as to the work to be done first. This input is then sifted, evaluated, and considered in relation to priorities and philosophy. The work objectives are then rank ordered in terms of importance, and those that can be accomplished within a specifiedpe- riod of time, usually a year, are chosen for further development. First, the broader objectives of the department are developed to guide in-

159 Tilley, Gross, & Cox

dividual administrators in developing their ownuniquework plan. De- partmental objectives should be stated broadly enough toallow consider- able flexibility for individuals, but clear enough tohave specific observable outcomes. An actual example of objectives dealing withdisciplinary problems of handicapped students follows: A. The Department of Special Education will analyze andrevise present pro- cedures for dealing with handicapped students who are disruptive,explore new alternative procedures at the buildinglevel, arid provide direct services to staff and parents on disciplinary alternatives. Specifically, thedepartment will do the following: 1. Revise the guidelines for disciplining students withhandicaps so that tkey conform to legal requirements and allow for flexibility and staffjudgment. 2. Develop alternative strategies with school principals forhandling disTptive behaviors at the building level. 3. Develop plans-for the implementation of inservicetraining in dealing with disruptive behaviors. This will include training for all staff in abuilding, i,ncluding kitchen and meal service personnel, school secretaries,bus driv- ers, custodians, and any other staff at thebuilding level. 4. Provide direceservice to building staff based uponrevised guidelines, prin- cipals' recommendations, and inservice training plans. 5. Provide direct servides to parents in the form of groupclasses on behavior management. 6. Provide individual consultation to a limited numberof families (10) and rel- event staff. 7. Continue community referrals when appropriate,and produce a resource di- rectory for referring families and staff to appropriate services, Procedures that may be used include: 1. Establish a task force of principals to study the problemsand propose recom- N mendations. 2. Plan alternatilie strategies to handle disruptiveproblems. One approach is the submission of a grant application to fund a three-yeardemonstration, project for secondary levachildren with behavior disorVers. 3. Develop a model/demenstratiori classroom at theelementapr level for dis- ruptive children. 4. Increase inservice training to staff on disciplinaryprocedures and program options for handicapped students who exhibit inappropriatebehavior. 5. Work with community agencies to identifysolutions to these problems. \ B. Evaluation of this goal will have both process andproduct coMponentS. Prod- .ucts include: new disciplinary guidelines for thedistrict; tangible results from work with other community agencMs (e,g., submission of grants),and recom- mendations from the principals task force. The processes that are used will be reviewed by the (lirector todetermine 1) if input was received from representatives of concernedstaff, and 2) that those

60 160 Administrative Issues in Educating the Emotionally Disturbed

,-

P most closely involved with disciplinary decisions were incltided in revising the guidelines and in developing alternative plans and inservice training plans. The net effect of this goal is to increase the staff's ability to handle disruptive behavior and to have procedures for changing the educational program and/or placement of a handicapped student that are in the best interest of the student, meet federal and state regulations, and prOide for maximum use of staff judg; ment and flexibility in implementation.

C. Review of the work plans: The director will meet monthly or more frequently,as needed, with the managers of the department to review the work plans for this objective.

Individual supervisors and administrators-were then charged with devel- oping parts of this objective within their own area of expertiseor respon- sibility. The work was coordinated among administrators and the result was a comprehensive solution for dealing with discipline issues across all programs. Specific policy, classroom procedures, and staff training programs were developed and implemented.

Managing Objectives It is not enough to set objectives. They also must be managed. One criti- cism ofteti'made of the process of developing objectives is that they sit on the shelf and are never utilized. Monitoring of objectives should include periodic reviews to evaluate progress toward the objectives. Thesezhould occur dt least quarterfy and should result in clear, unambiguous state- ments regarding the status of each objective. Such a process keeps the departmental work on track, allows time for corrective action when things go wrong, allows for help to be given, and keeps staff from being surprised at the end of the year.

Communication Much has been written regarding the central role of trust in a successful organization. Quality communication is that which communicates an idea, sincerely invites input, and feeds back how the input was utilized. People need to feel that they have a stake in the organization and can influence its directions and activities. Effective communication enhances these feelings and leads to more interested participation.

In successful programs, the staff have a unified sense of the direction and philosophy of the organization. They may not always agree with the thrust, but they know what it is. The administrators of these organiza- tions almost compulsively involv.e and communicate /ith staff. They de- velop creative newsletters that invite response, meet face to face with staff to apprise them of major issues that affect them, and always empha- size two-way communication. They ask for and use staff input.

1 6 9 161 Tilley, Gross, & Cox

'.Ti.aining for Excellence Another characteristic of successful programs in special education is the importance given to inservice training and staff development activities. With reducing enrollments and generally hard economic times, there is much less population mobility and job changing. The result is often an aginkundertrained staff without the skills to implement innovative ideas. This factor is compounded by teacher association contracts that re- quire seniority as the basis for transfers, placements, and layoffs. The ad- ministrator is practically helpless to staff programs with the most appro- priate persons. This can result in devastating damage to otherwise sound programs. The most positive way to deal with thesesituations is to de- velop a comprehensive, ongoing training program for all staff to assure that the skills necessary are developed. Also, with the technology and knowledge' explosion, teacher skills are out of date much sooner than before. Training programs are nolonger a luxury; they are absolutely critical to survival. Successfuladministrators know this and have worked to incorporate training as an integral, long- term part of their special education programs.

Evaluation Successful programs are serious about discdvering how successful they really are. Much attention is given to the collection and analysis of data that have relevance for program decisions. Data need to be collected at several levels.- The most basic and ultimately most useful level is the classroom. Teach- ers need to use efficient data collection systems to answerkey questions as to the effectiveness of their instructionand interventions. 'I he whole purpose of special education is to produce positiveacademic and social behavioral changes. It is surprising how many programs, maybe even most programs, place little emphasis on measuring studentchange, ex- cept perhaps in the crudest forms. Admittedly, this is atouchy area. Unions quickly get involved when teachers are required to keep data on students. Only when the teachers themselves see the value of the data will they support the effort and make it successful. This means the sys- tem chosen must be relevant to instruction, efficient, andhave demon- strated usefulness. If the data collection system meets these require- ments, staff will be more likely to cooperate. Data also should be collected on attitudes, validity of models,successful instructional strategies, and variables related to broad management needs such as parent satisfaction and cost effectiveness of various programs. Armed with up-to-date information on all aspects of the program, the ad- ministrator is secure in making decisions and can counter criticism in controversial areas.

162 Administrative Issues in Educating the Emotionally Disturbed

Politics In its broadest sense, politics must be constantly considered if a program is to survive. No program or administrator operatesin a vacuum. While special education has often been accused of being a separate school sys- tem with its own rules and budgets, it is changing rapidly. With the em- phasis on least restrictive environment, special education administrators must atteni to the social and political interactions in and out of the dis- trict. The natural overlap of responsibilities between building principals and special education program managers is a constant problem. Who is in charge? Only through productive dialogue can this question be resolved. Is special education a line or a staff organization? Do special education students get too many rights and privileges? Are normal children neg- lected? The questions come incessantly. The administrator must develop excellent relations with the persons or groups who ask these questions, and work with them, both to increase their understanding and tolerance as well as to assist them in carrying out their own responsibilities. The administrator must be an enlightened advocate. Intemperate demands will result in rejection by the regular education forces. Insufficient de- mands will result in parent dissatisfaction. The successful administrator must find a way to walk a fine line between conflicting philosophies, while maintaining the quality of the educational programs.

Summary

No program exists in isolation. Successful progam administrators must see themselves as part of a large, interdependent, and even international program development activity. Special education is, in a sense, a rela- tively new field. Certainly since the passage of PL94-142the field has achieved a legitimacy and visibility unknown before. With increased vi- sibilty comes increased responsibility. In terms of progress for emotion- ally disturbed, there are problems. There are few validated models or proven approaches. Program development involves a constant search for the best and then adapting it into existing systems. Administrators are not only faced with developing effective programs, but also with the task of ensuring that these programs meet all legal re- quirements. The outcome, quality education foi emotionally disturbed children, is achieved only through careful management coupled with at- tention to needs and priorities of the regular educators, parents, and com- munity members. It is unreasonable to suggest that the process is any more complex foilthe emotionally disturbed than for other handicapping conditions. Administering special education programs is, in general, a tough job. But onLy through attention to administrative concerns can we significantly alter the lives ef troubled young people in the educational system. 1 7i 163 Tilley, Gross, & Cox

Reference List

Berkowitz, P. H., & Rothman, E. P. The disturbed child. New York: University Press, 1960.

Deno, E. Special education as developmental capital. Exceptional Children, 1970, 37, 229-237.

Education for the Handicapped Law Report. Washington; D.C.: CRR Publishing Company, Vol.

Federal Register, Vol. 42, No. 163, Tuesday, August 23. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office, 1977. Flygare. T. H. Schools and the law: The surpreme court approves corporal punishment. Phi Delta Kappa, 1978, 59, 397-398. Gardner, W. I. Learning and behavior characteristics of exceptional children and youth. Allyn and Bacon. ln., Boston, 1977. Gearhart, B. R., & Weishahn, M. W. The handicapped child iff.the regular classroom. Saint Louis: The C. V. Mosby Company, 1976.

Hallahan, D. P., & Kauffman. J. M. Labels, categories, behaviors: ED. LD, and EMR reconsid- elournal of Special Education,1978, 1 1. 139-149. flaring, N., & Phillips, E. Educating emotionally disturbed children. New York: McGraw-I lill Book Company. 1962. Hewett, F. M., & Farness, S. R. Education of exceptional learners. Second edition. Allyn and Bacon. Inc.. Boston, 1977. 607-631. Kauffman, J. M. Nineteer'''. century views of children's behavior disorders: Flistorical contri- bution and continuing issues. Journal of Special Education. 1976. 10, 335-349. Neisworth, J. T., & Greer, J. G. Functional similarities of learning disability and mild retarda- tion. Exceptional Children, 1975, 42(2), 17- 25. Public Law 99-142. Education for All Handicapped Children Act of 1975. 99th Congress, S-6, November 29, 1975. Public Law 94-142, Rules and Regulations. Implementation of Part B of the Education for All I landicappecl Act, Federal Register, 42(163). August 23. 1977.

Section 504. Rehabilitation Act of 1973, Public Law 93-112. Section 504. Part 84- Nondiscrimination on the Basis of Handicap in FederallyAssisted Pm- grams. Rules and regulations. 1977.

172

164